You are on page 1of 334

All rights reserved.

Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic:


J=0 to 9 channel units
n=1 to 9 channel units

FPGA
Switch commands
Agent
Service

FAST SERIAL BUS

Mod FailJ
EWj
LBERj
HBERj

SW forcing

DSI 64 kb/s
to/from EPLD

SWITCH
LOGIC

Modem
J =0
9
Modem
J =09
DEMfailj
DemCARD fail j
Modem missing j
Los Mod j

KRRA
To RRASTBY
KOP

Logic
Output

Korifn
To RRA 1/9

KRPS

Yellow led

Serial/Parallel

RRA fail j
RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY
RRAmissing
J=0
Los R side Dem j
n=1
LosStbyn
OK pat n
Ok bit n
K_OPMAN
Los_Rifn

RRASTBY
FROM RRAJ

K display RX

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

301 / 514

5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams


Please refer to:

para.2.4.3.2 on page 53 for an introductive description


Tab. 27. on page 156 for the transceiver equipping rules
para.3.7.4 on pages 158 thru 167 for the assembly drawings and operative notes.

The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating
frequency.
Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 156. on page 303 for the
transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 157. on page 303 for the transceiver configuration
with Rx diversity):

transmit & service module


receiver & IF Rx module (main & diversity)
DC/DC converter
Local oscillators RX and TX

Fig. 158. on page 304 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules.
For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique
block.
A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx,
via software. RI is housed in the service TX.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

A pin No_missing is available.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

302 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.5 Transceiver subsystem

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

OL TX MON
+VB
GND
VB

OL TX

DC/DC
CONVERTER

RF TX
RF OUT

RI
RF MON

SERVICE TRX
IF IN

RI

P
OL RX MON

Canbus
No_missing

L.O. Sync
.
RX IN

RF RX

OL RX
RI

IF OUT

Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity

OL TX MON
+VB
GND
VB

OL TX

DC/DC
CONVERTER

RF TX
RF OUT

RI
RF MON

SERVICE TRX
IF IN

RI

P
OL RX MON

Canbus
No_ missing

L.O. Sync
.

OL RX
RI

RF RX
RF RX
MAIN

RX IN

RX IN

RF RX
DIV.

IF OUT

RF RX

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

IF OUT

Fig. 157. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

303 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
+V Battery

V Battery
+5V

RF

955.203.292 Q

RX

OL
Main

IF
MON

Main

OL

RF

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

MW

IF

TX & SERVICE MODULE


RF

Canbus
MON

DC/DC
RX
OL

Diversity

OL
Diversity
OL TX

IF

MON

Fig. 158. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules

5.5.2 DC/DC converter module

DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the
following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 158.

03

304 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

+3.3V
+8V
+15V
12V
Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
4 Bit Remote inventory

Manual gain control


Manual/Auto RX command
OL+/ command

Squelch
4 Bit Remote inventory

+5V
12V
Measurement

+3.3V
+8V
+15V
12V
Squelch
Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
4 Bit Remote inventory

OL+/ command

Manual gain control


Manual/Auto RX command

Squelch
4 Bit Remote inventory

+5V
12V
PRX Measurement

adj +7V
+8V
4 Bit control for +7V adj

OR alarm module

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.5.3 Transmit and Service module


GENERAL
Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components (depicted
in Fig. 81. on page 159:

RT CONTROL

AMPLIFIER

UP CONVERTER

DELAY LINE
Fig. 159. herebelow shows the module block diagram.
IF input connectors are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50. Coaxial
cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by dropin
isolator.
Transmit & service module performs the following functions:

management of all transceiver functions by mean of service module

IF amplification

upconversion of IF input signal to RF frequency

linear microwave amplification


+5V MW

DC/DC

+8V

+5V
Power. red
+8V

Drain fet finale


PTX meas
.
Temp
. Meas
.

+7V adj
4 Bit for 7V

Attenuator
. com
+5V
+3,3V

RXmain
+5V

OL TX
+8V

+5V
12V

12V

+3,3V

+8V

OL+/command

+15V

+15V

12V

Squelch

Remoteinventory
Manual gain control
Manual/auto

Alarm loss loop


Alarm low level
3 bit dati control
Remote. inv

RX div .

Can bus

IFblock

In IF

OL RX
+8V
+3,3V

+5V
12V
OL+/ command
Squelch
Remote inventory

IF detectorlevel

+15V

OL+/OL command

12V
Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
3 bit dati control

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Manual gain control


Manual/auto

Remote. inv
Squelch

Fig. 159. Transmit and Service module block diagram

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

305 / 514

RT CONTROL

DC power distribution of the following voltages to different modules:

TX amplifier : 12V, +5V, +8V, +15V ,+7Vmax.

RX module: 12V, +5V.

OL module : 12V, +3.3V, +8V, +15V


Gain and output power of amplifying chain control
Cable losses recovering
Input IF level control
OL+/ for upconverter setting

A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made
with an EPROM. Controlled functions are:

Tx module

linearization and temperature compensation of transmitted power.


warning management
protection vs overtemperature
management of BER measure
management of ATPC function with power consumption control
setting of Tx Pout .
ON/OFF by software command.
Selection of LO+ or LO condition.

In Tx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:


RF detector level output
RF Attenuator command series
RF Attenuator command parallel
PTx Measurement
Temperature Measurement
Manual/Automatic TX command
Tx Temperature alarm
IF Tx detector level
OR alarm module
12V
+8V
+15V
+7V (digitally adjustable)
OL+/OL command
Presence reference negative voltage
Switch command for +8V
ATPC control

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LO module

warning management.
Selection of frequency.
ON/OFF by software command.
Selection of Master/Slave condition (for RxLO only)

In LO module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:


Alarm loss loop TX
Alarm low level TX
Dati

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

306 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

RT control performs the following functions:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Rx module

warning management.
linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication.
Selection of master/slave condition.
Selection of LO+ or LO condition.
ON/OFF by software command.
squelching.

In Rx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:


PRx Measurement
Manual/Automatic RX command
Squelch command
Manual gain command
OL+/OL command

DC/DC converter

warning management.
voltage control with ATPC command for power consumption reduction.

AMPLIFIER, UP CONVERTER AND DELAY LINE


The block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 160. herebelow.
REVEALED

LO

OUT
RF

xn

IF

Vatt

MONITORED

n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz


Fig. 160. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit
1)

IF TX
The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W.
It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from 12
dBm to 4 dBm ( standard input level is: 5 dBm).
IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits
include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet
drain.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90
is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

307 / 514

2)

UPCONVERSION

In the same package are placed an SSB mixer, with four IF quadrature input signals, and a x2
frequency multiplier. The IF input level is 11 dBm +0 / 1 dB, and LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB
For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC
placed in the same package.
On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an
active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology.
3)

LINEAR MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION


The RF output of upconverter is feeded into the input of power amplifier.
This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have
an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the dropin isolator, a double microstrip
directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The circuits are implemented on a duroid metalbacked substrate.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

308 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The mixer is implemented in MMIC technology developed in Alcatel.

5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GENERAL
RF
IN

xn

Vatt
IF

LO

n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz


Fig. 161. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module
Receive & IF Rx module performs the following functions:

low noise amplification of RF incoming signal


signal variable attenuation following the incoming signal variations
downconversion to IF signal
IF amplification.

The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50
.The return losses are guaranteed by dropin isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75
1.0/2.3 Siemens.
FRONT END
The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier.
A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation.
A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier.
The downconversion from RF to IF frequency is performed by the same micromodule used in
upconversion function. It has four IF outputs signal in quadrature. A MMIC multiplier x2 doubles the
L.O frequency (x4 in 11 GHz version). The LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB.
The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90 and 180 to create IF signal ; by properly connecting
hybrid 90 is possible to select LSB or USB.
IF Rx

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter
reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low
field, for RFRx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF
section is the squelch of RX for low fields

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

309 / 514

5.5.5 Local Oscillator module

LO scheme for 9600LSY application includes the following functions:

TX LO module

Rx LO module, selectable master or slave option for H/V reuse applications.


A block diagram of the module is shown in the next Fig. 162.

Lock
Alarm

Power
Alarm

Switch
Position

Master
Slave

Output Power Detection

Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection

VCO

Switch

X2
Multiplier

Splitter

Lock Detect

Switch Position

Diversity
Output

Main
Output
VCO
Output

External
VCO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 162. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

310 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GENERAL

TRANSMITTER LO MODULE

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier.
It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the
synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an
external VCO signal.
1)

Synthesizer
The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL
function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2 order active loop filter.
The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO.
At the output theres RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits.
The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status.

2)

Multiplier
The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, bandpass
filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter.
To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked.
The unit makes available the output power detection
External VCO Input Power
5 dBm + 5 dBm

3)

Master/Slave Configuration
The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is
connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the
internal VCO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

RECEIVER LO MODULE

ED

1)

Synthesizer
As that of Transmitter LO Module

2)

Multiplier
As that of Transmitter LO Module

3)

Master/Slave Configuration

In Master configuration the LO runs with its internal VCO .


At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO and there is no power delivered
at the output ports; when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO and
give power at the outputs.
This setting does not to be modified by alarm during the running condition.
A buffer (Frequency Reuse kit module) is present between the output of the external VCO
and the MASTER/SLAVE input, with the aim of increasing insulation.

In Slave configuration the LO runs with external VCO.


At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO, after the start up time, if is
not detected the VCO external power, the Switch must connect the internal VCO.
During the running condition, in the case of lack of VCO external power, the switch must
connect the internal VCO; when the power of external VCO is back, the Switch must
reconnect the external VCO.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

311 / 514

The following Fig. 163. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED
units.
Fig. 164. on page 313 shows the block diagram of one FANS ASSEMBLED unit.
Please refer to:

para.2.4.6 on page 61 for an introductive description


para.3.9 on pages 169 thru 173 for equipping rules, assembly drawings and operative notes
point f ) on page 284 for the power supply description.

The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control
subsystem, through the CAN bus:

the Remote Inventory


its logical address according to the position of the DIPSwitches present on the Fanshelf front panel
the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).

FAN B

FAN D

FAN B

FAN D

FAN A

FAN C

FAN A

FAN C

0/1

0/1

LED
CAN
BATTERYA

LED
CAN TERMINATION
BATTERYB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 163. Fan subsystem block diagram

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

312 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.6 Fans subsystem

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

CAN

ED

955.203.292 Q
BATT. B
BATT. A

RI

FAN ALARM

PSU
PSU

PSU ALARM

FAN B
FAN D

FAN A
FAN C

LED

Fig. 164. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram

03

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

313 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

314 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY.
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values
Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values
This chapter is organized as follows:

System characteristics

General Characteristics

Power supply characteristics

Mechanical characteristics

on page 316, including:


on page 317
on page 323
on page 323

Transceiver characteristics

on page 324

Regenerator and Modem characteristics

Modem

XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only)

Regenerator

Power consumption (Regenerator only)

Branching interfaces

on page 332

Protections

on page 332

Environmental characteristics
on page 333, including:

General characteristics

Mechanically active substances

ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations

ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations

Storage

Transportation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Optical Safety

on page 326, including:


on page 326
on page 328
on page 329
on page 331

on page 333
on page 333
on page 334
on page 335
on page 337
on page 338

on page 339

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

315 / 514

6.2 System Characteristics

May support both STM1 and STM0 transmission

Tolerance: 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; 1.5 dB in temperature range 5 C 55C

Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification:


A
TX

A
RX

RF TX
FILTER

RF RX
FILTER

TX
BRANCHING

RX
BRANCHING

TX
FEEDER

RX
FEEDER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 165. ETSI Reference points

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

316 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.2.1 General characteristics


EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

Version

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

INDOOR

Mechanical practice

See para.2.4.2 page 51

Station type

Regenerator Terminal Wireless Multiservice Node (one side or two sides)

Configuration

N+0 / N+1

Space diversity

YES

Transmission
capacity
(2 x STM1 with
frequency reuse
with STM1 only)

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)

User interfaces

Service channels

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM0

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM0

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM0

Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703


Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703
Optical ITUT Rec. G.957 G.958

STM 1 : 1 x 2 Mbit/s WST in RFCOH


STM0 : no WST

Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (rec. Q23) 600 Ohm Tx 0 dB,
Rx 4 dB, selective call.
3 x 64 Kb/s V11 or 2x 64 Kb/s + 1x 128 Kb/s (SW
configurablecontradirectional)
3 x 64 Kb/s G.703 (codirectional)
1 x 9.6 Kb/s RS 232
TMN channel ( D1D3 regenerator terminal D4 D12 WMSN )
voice frequency party line (E1) (Four wire bal. , 600 Ohm, level 3 dB
1 voice frequency (point to point only)
Digital party line for extension 64 Kb/s, G. 703 code
Output to loudspeaker 400 mW, 4 Ohm
Telephone set driver for TPH desk 600 Ohm, Tx 0 dB, Rx 4 dB.

TBD
TBD

LHR Transit time

STM1

STM0

1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)

155.520 Mb/s (STM1)


139.264 Mb/s (PDH)
3 x 34.368 Mbit/s
3 x 44.736 Mbit/s
63 x 2.048 Mbit/s
155.520 Mb/s (STM1)

Auxiliary channels

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9647
LSY

Tx Spectrum (C)

Fig. 171. on page 343

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

317 / 514

Spectrum
Scrambler/
Descrambler

STM1

STM0

9640
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

7.47.7
F.385
annex1)

7.78.3
(F. 386)

10.7
11.7
(F.387)

12.75
13.25
(F.497) t

7.17.7
(F.385
annex3)

8.28.5
(F.386
annex3)
t

3.64.2
(DTI)

7.47.9
(F.385
annex4)
t

7.98.4
(annex4)
t

3.64.2
(F.635)

7.27.6
(F.385
rec.1) t

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9674
LSY

221.31
2201

MODULATION
FREQUENCY
BAND [GHz]
(Channel plan)

9667
LSY

128 QAM
3.64.2
(F.635)

4.45.0
(F.1099)

5.96.4
(F.383)

3.64.2
(F.382)

4.45.0
(Spain)

5.66.2
(OIRT)

6.47.1
(F.384)

3.43.9
(OIRT)

TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
(W ATPC) *
[dBm]
(A)

32,0

32,0

32,0

32,0

32,0

32,0

30,0

28,0

TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
(W/O ATPC) *
[dBm]
(A)

30.0

30.0

30.0

30.0

30.0

30.0

28.0

27.0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

318 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT
1x103 BER TH
(A)
(Received
power) [dBm]
STM1

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

74,0
typ
73,0
gua

74,0
typ
73,0
gua

74,0
typ
73,0
gua

74,0
typ
73,0
gua

73,5
typ
72,5
gua

73,5
typ
72,5
gua

73,5
typ
72,5
gua

73,0
typ
72,0
gua

78,5
typ
77,5
gua

78,5
typ
77,5
gua

N.A.

78,0
typ
77,0
gua

71,5
typ
70,5
gua

71,5
typ
70,5
gua

71,5
typ
70,5
gua

71,0
typ
70,0
gua

76,5
typ
75,5
gua

76,5
typ
75,5
gua

N.A.

76,0
typ
75,0
gua

1x103 BER TH
(A)
(Received
power) [dBm]
STM0
1x106 BER TH
(A)
(Received
power) [dBm]
STM1

N.A.

72,0
typ
71,0
gua

72,0
typ
71,0
gua

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1x106 BER TH
(A)
(Received
power) [dBm]
STM0

72,0
typ
71,0
gua

72,0
typ
71,0
gua

N.A.

Net System Gain


(CC) dB* (with
branching losses
and with ATPC)
STM1 103
1+1 and 3+1
Heterofreq.

98

97.5

100

100.5

98.5

98.5

96

93.5

Net System Gain


(CC) dB* (with
branching losses
and with ATPC)
STM1 106
1+1and 3+1
Heterofreq.

96

95.5

98

98.5

96.5

96.5

94

91.5

Max input power at


antenna port
(Received field
[dBm]
103/1010

16,0/TBD

Background BER
(at nominal Prx
level)

1 x 10E13

Frequency reuse
(XPIC)

YES

(STM1 only)

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

319 / 514

NFD one adjacent


channels (guar)
STM1 [dB]

9640
LSY
>50 @
40 MHz
>45 @
29 MHz

NFD one adjacent


channels (guar)
STM0 dB
XPD antenna for
CCDP application
[dB]
XPIC filters

N.A.

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

>50 @
40 MHz

>50 @
29.65
MHz

N.A.

N.A.

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

>50 @ >45 @
40 MHz 28 MHz

N.A.

t.b.d.

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

>50 @
29.65
MHz

>50 @
40 MHz

t.b.d.

t.b.d.

N.A.

t.b.d.

38

19 taps

XPI ratio lockin


[dB]

XPI ratio lockout


[dB]

= 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

320 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

Behavior vs
modulated digital
channel
interference:

cochannel
STM1 1*103

cochannel
STM1 1*106

cochannel
STM0 1*103

Fig. 175. on page 345

Fig. 175.
on page 345

N.A.

cochannel
STM0 1*106

adj.channel
STM1 40 MHz
1*103

adj.channel
STM1 40 MHz
1*106

adj.channel
STM1 30 MHz
1*103

Fig. 176.

Fig. 176.
on page 346

N.A.

adj.channel
STM1 30 MHz
1*106

adj.channel
STM0 14 MHz
1*103
N.A.

adj.channel
STM0 14 MHz
1*106

pg.345

Fig. 176.
N.A.

pg.346

Fig. 177. on page 347

Fig. 175.
N.A.

N.A.

N.A.
pg.346

Fig. 177.

Fig. 177.
on page 347

N.A.

Fig. 178. on page


347

N.A.

pg.347

Fig. 178.
pg.347

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

321 / 514

C/I for 1 dB
threshold degrad.
@ 10E3 [dB] :

cochannel
STM1/STM0

adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 40MHz

adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 30MHz

adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM0 14 MHz
C/I for 1 dB
threshold degrad.
@ 10E6 [dB]:

cochannel
STM1/STM0

adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 40MHz

adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 30MHz

adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM0 14 MHz
C/I dB for Error
Free:
cochannel
STM1/STM0

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

50

50

N.A.

50

N.A.

N.A.

50

N.A.

29

29

29

N.A.

29

29

N.A.

29

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

TBD

N.A.

TBD

TBD

33

33

33

33

33

33

33

33

48

48

N.A.

48

N.A.

N.A.

48

N.A.

24

24

24

N.A.

24

24

N.A.

24

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

TBD

TBD

N.A.

TBD

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

BER Curve:

STM1

STM0

ED

Fig. 169. on page 341

N.A.

Fig. 170.
on page 342

Fig. 170.
N.A.
pg.342

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

322 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

6.2.2 Power supply characteristics

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

Input battery source

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

48 to 60 Vdc
or
24 Vdc

POWER
CONSUMPT.
Tolerance $ 10%
[W]
W/o Sp.Div. (with
Sp.Div.)

200
280
350
430
510
590
670

1+1/2+0 Het.
2+1/3+0 Het.
3+1/4+0 Het.
4+1/5+0 Het.
5+1/6+0 Het.
6+1/7+0 Het.
7+1/8+0 Het.

(210)
(300)
(380)
(460)
(540)
(630)
(710)

6.2.3 Mechanical characteristics


EQUIPMENT

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Rack dimensions
[mm]
all configurations
weight:

1+1 Regen.

3+1 Regen.

ED

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

(l x d x h)
600 x 300 x 2200
TBD
TBD

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

323 / 514

6.3 Transceiver characteristics

Tolerance: 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; 1.5 dB in temperature range 5 C 55C .

(*)

Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification (Fig. 165. on
page 316)
EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

+15 to
+32

+15 to
+32

+15 to
+32

+15 to
+32

+15 to
+32

+15 to
+32

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+28

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+30

+15 to
+28

+15 to
+27

Max. ATPC Range


[dB]

17

17

17

17

17

17

15

13

NF guaranteed [dB]
NF Typical
[dB]

2.3
2.0

2.3
2.0

2.5
2.2

2.5
2.2

2.8
2.5

2.8
2.5

3.0
2.7

3.5
3.2

Tx output range
with ATPC
guaranteed.
( A) ( * )
[dBm]

Tx output range
w/o ATPC (1dB
step by SW preset)
guaranteed.
(A) ( * )
[dB]

IF freq. [MHz]

140

Nominal Received
level [dBm]

30

IF Nominal input /
output level [dBm]

5 1 dB

L.O. freq. stability


(p.p.m.)

10

AGC range [dB]

> 60

AGC response time


[dB/sec.]

100

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

324 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

Transmitted
spectrum
(Typical) (C)
STM1
STM0

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

Fig. TBD

ETSI normatives
Referred for
spectrum mask:

Referred class
STM1
Referred class
STM0

ETSI EN 300234, EN 301127, EN 301461


ETSI EN 301216

Spectral lines at
symbol rate (dBm)

Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq.
arrangement

Tx and Rx spurious
signals emission

Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq.
arrangement

IF filter selectivity
STM1/STM0

See Fig. 172. on page 344

Transceiver power
consumption [W]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

1+1/2+0
2+1/3+0
3+1/4+0
4+1/5+0
5+1/6+0
6+1/7+0
7+1/8+0

120
180
230
290
350
410
470

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

325 / 514

6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics

EQUIPMENT
Modulation type
Coding MLC
Error corrector
Coding gain
Radio scrambler/
descrambler
Equivalent roll off
factor
Gross symbol rate
[Mbit/s]
STM1
STM0
Intermediate
modulator
frequency
[MHz]

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

MLC 6.5/7 (7.69 % redundancy)


TBD
2 7,3 1
0.21

24.458
8.153
140 " 50 ppm

IF nominal
modulator output
level [dBm]

5 " 1 dB

IF input/output
Return Loss (all
modem ports)

x 25 dB in the band 140 MHz " 15 MHz

Digital filter
Demodulation
IF demodulator
nominal input level
[dBm]
Post demodulation
filter
STM1
STM0

9613
LSY

2/3 7/8 2423

75 Ohm

Shaping filter and


equalizer (Rx side)

9611
LSY

128 QAM CROSS

IF impedance
(all modem ports)

Shaping filter (Tx


side)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9640
LSY

Raised cosine
T/2 equaliser ( 19 taps )
36 taps
coherent
5 (+1 to 6 dB)

Butterworth 9 poles
Fig. 173. on page 345
Fig. 174. on page 345

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

326 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.4.1 Modem

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

Demodulator
bandwidth
recovery [MHz]

$ 0.8

Clock recovery time


after IF interruption
[msec.]

< 100

Synchronism
recovery
[msec.]

x 0.1

Signature
STM1:
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
STM0 :
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

Kn gua. = 0.9 ;
Kn gua. =1 ;

Kn typ.= 0.4 9
Kn typ.= 0. 55

(6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 179. pg.348


(6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 180. pg.349

Kn gua. = 1.3 ;
Kn gua. = 1.5 ;

Kn typ.= 0.55
Kn typ.= 0.65

(6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 181. pg.350


(6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 182. pg.351

C/N STM1 [dB]


BER =1*10E3

24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ

BER =1*10E4

25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ

BER =1*10E6

26.5 Guar 25.5 Typ

C/N STM0 [dB]


BER =1*10E3

24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ

BER =1*10E4

25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ

BER =1*10E6

26.5 Guar 25.5 Typ

Modem Transit time


Absolute delay
Interleave block
length

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Carrier recovery
(after RF
interruption) msec.

ED

t.b.d.

120 symbols
x 500 (STM1)
t.b.d.

(STM0)

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

327 / 514

EQUIPMENT

Intermediate
frequency
[MHz]
IF Nominal input
[dBm]
IF impedance

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

75 Ohm

Post demodulation
filter

Butterworth 9 poles

Adaptive equalizer

T/2 19 taps

Base Band static


delay equalization
[ns]

0 to 140 step T/2

ED

9613
LSY

5 (+1 to 6 dB)

x 25 dB in the band 140 MHz " 15 MHz

@ 1x103

9611
LSY

140 " 1

IF input Return loss

XPIF Guar [dB]


@ 1x106

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9640
LSY

17 for symmetrical degradation


( 3 dB less for unbalanced degradation )
TBD

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

328 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only)

6.4.3 Regenerator

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

Input/output signal

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9681
LSY

User interface

75 Ohm

Level

1V pp
12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf

Cable equalizer
Optical input

NRZ+CK
155.520 Mb/s

I/O signal
elect. Interf.
Code

ITUT G.703 (Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector)

Impedance

75 ohm unbal.

Signal level

1 Vpp

Return loss

15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz

Input cable
equalizer

12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf

CMI

Max. input jitter

ITUT G.825

Max. output jitter

ITUT G.958

Jitter transfer
function

ITUT G.958

9613
LSY

Electrical Optical

Impedance

9611
LSY

271

Bit rate

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9674
LSY

155.520 Mb/s 4.6 p.p.m. (standard payload )


155.520 Mb/s 20 p.p.m. (AIS payload )

Line Scrambler/
Desc.

9667
LSY

I/O signal
optical inter.
Operating
wavelength.
Min. Sensitivity
dBm
Min. overload
dBm
Output mean
launched
power dBm

ITUT G.957

(S1.1 type FCPC and SC connectors)


12601360 nm
28
8

8 (max.) ; 15 (min.)

table continues

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

329 / 514

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

Max. input jitter

ITUT G.825

Max. output jitter

ITUT G.958

Jitter transfer
function

ITUT G.958

DCCr (D1 to D3)


bit rate Kbit/s
interface

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

192
Managed internally by the System Controller

DCCm (D4 to D12)


bit rate Kbit/s
interface

The entire MSOH is not managed and passedthrough


576
Not managed by pass condition

Unprotected 2Mbit/s
I/O access
I/O signal bit rate
I/O level
Signal Code

From backpanel access area


1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm
2048 Kb/s G 703
2.37 V p
HDB3

Protected 2Mbit/s
I/O access
I/O signal bit rate
I/O level
Signal Code

From Service unit front panel


1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm
2048 Kb/s G 703
2.37 V p
HDB3

AIS management:

Regenerator
Tx and/or Rx
side

64 Kbit/s
channels
Tx/Rx
Alarms
detection/removal
[msec].

9613
LSY
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EQUIPMENT

MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all1 pattern on MSOH and payload
in case of LOS,LOF)
All 1

Loss Of Frame : 3/1 (24 frames/8 frames)


Loss Of Signal : 0.625/0.250 (5 frames/2 frames)
Out Of Frame Detection : >1000 ones or zeros consecutively

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ATPC channel

ED

64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

330 / 514

6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

W " 10%
EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

1+1/2+0 Hetero

80

2+1/3+0 Hetero

100

3+1/4+0 Hetero

120

4+1/5+0 Hetero

140

5+1/6+0 Hetero

160

6+1/7+0 Hetero

180

7+1/8+0 Hetero

200

ED

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

331 / 514

9640
LSY
RF feeder interface

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

UDR 40 UDR 48 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 84

Tx/Rx Antenna
circulator common
port input return
loss [dB] (C, C)

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

UDR
100

UDR
120

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

x 26

6.6 Protections
EQUIPMENT

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

Radio Protection
Switching (RPS)
type

1+1/N+1

Occasional traffic

Optional, available only in N+1

RPS Switching
Method

Hitless revertive and not revertive in 1+1


Hitless revertive in N+1

RPS Criteria /
Switching Time
[ms]

RRA/MODEM Failure
RRA/MODEM Missing unit
HBER ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )
LBER ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )
EW ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )

RPS Switching time


[msec.]

1+1

N+1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9640
LSY

1 (from alarm detection)


10 (from alarm detection)

Tx/Rx Static delay


equalization bits

0256 ( 1 bit step )

Max. dynamic
recoverable delay
bits

10

Regenerator user
interface protection

ED

Not available

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

332 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.5 Branching interfaces

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.7 Environmental characteristics


6.7.1 General characteristics
EQUIPMENT

9640
LSY

9647
LSY

9662
LSY

9667
LSY

9674
LSY

9681
LSY

9611
LSY

9613
LSY

Environment:

EMIEMC
Safety
Temperature
Humidity
Transportation
Storage

Compliant with EN 55022 ETSI EN 3014891 ETSI EN 3014894


Compliant with IEC 60950 add. IV and IEC 215
5/+55C ;
5 to 95 %
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 2.3
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 1.2

6.7.2 Mechanically active substances


ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters:
Environmental Parameter

Value

a) Sand

30 mg/m3

b) Dust (suspension)

0.2 mg/m3

c) Dust (sedimentation)

1.5 mg/ (m2 h)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Overcoming these values could affect Fans Assembled Unit operation. For further information, see
para.7.6.2 on page 374.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

333 / 514

See climatogram on Fig. 166. herebelow


This applies to locations:

where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open
windows. They may be subjected to dew and to presence of water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitations;

where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;

with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;

In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;

with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to hardly perceptible vibrations.
The conditions of this class may be found in :

entrances and staircases of buildings;

garages;

cellars;

certain workshops;

buildings in factories and industrial process plants;

unattended equipment stations;

certain telecommunication buildings;

ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, etc.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

334 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations

6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations

This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not
controlled. The climatogram is shown in Fig. 167. herebelow:

50
45
40

35
30
20
10
5
0
5

25
20

10

1.5
1.0

20

ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

60

AIR TEMPERATURE 0C

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 72133 [3].

30
40
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %

Exceptional climatic limits.

Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits


have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
Values outside this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
72130 [2], Class 4)

NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 167. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations


Heating, cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used to necessarily maintain the required
conditions especially where there is a great difference between room environment and external high or
low temperatures.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

335 / 514

where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected
to dew, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing;

without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product
design, or installations at locations of such construction that mould growth and attacks by animals,
etc. are not likely to occur;

with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;

without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
close proximity to sources of sand or dust;

with insignificant vibration and shock.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The conditions of this class may be found in :

normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);

offices;

shops;

workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;

telecommunication centers;

storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

336 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This class applies to locations:

6.7.5 Storage

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The equipment meet the following requirements vs. storage:


ETS 300 019, class 1.2
Class 1.2

weatherproofed, not temperaturecontrolled storage location.

This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Fig. 168. herebelow.
This class applies to storage locations:

where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to dew, dripping water and to icing. They may also be
subjected to limited winddriven precipitation including snow;

where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;

with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;

in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;

with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The conditions of this class may occur in:

unattended buildings;

some entrances of buildings;

some garages and shacks.

Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

337 / 514

6.7.6 Transportation

The equipment meets the following requirements vs. transportation:


ETS 300 01911 : 1992, class 2.2
Class 2.2

Careful transportation.

This class applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with welldeveloped road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train with specially designed, shockreducing buffers.
Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included.
Extreme low temperature protection during transportation is permitted for equipment in its standard
packing:
At 40 C for 72 Hours maximum

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

without damaging the Optical interfaces.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

338 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 2.3

6.8 Optical Safety

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

This paragraph applies to LHR system only.


As far as OPTINEX Rack and 1650SMC are concerned, please refer to relevant Technical
Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471).

6.8.1 Related Units


This description is relevant only to LHR regenerator system. As far as 1650SMC equipment,
please refer to the relevant Technical Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471)
The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser
radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with
STM1 interfaces:

in LHR system: RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY units.

6.8.2 Hazard Level classification


The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHR system is given in Tab. 58.
on page 339.
The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 608251 (1993) and IEC
608252 (1993).
Tab. 58. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces

UNIT/PORT
STM1

OPTICAL INTERFACE

HAZARD LEVEL

S1.1 (short haul)

6.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in para.6.4.3 on page 329.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

339 / 514

The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning
the STM1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical
module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending
on the particular interface of the module (STM1 port). In the following description it is specified when the
label shall be affixed by the customer.
[1]

Standard label for all modules

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339).
[2]

Multilanguage Label Kit


The multilanguage label kit, for STM1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with
the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same (explanatory) above
depicted in the following languages:

Italian

Francaise

Spanish

German
The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the
preexisting ones or, in case of STM1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved
card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339)

6.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors


The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
and access cards front view:

in para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRACHANNEL unit)

in para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRASTANDBY unit)

6.8.6 Engineering design features


In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITUT G.958 Rec.
is implemented either on STM1 ports.
ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6.8.7 Safety instruction


The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.19.3
on page 484.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

340 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.8.4 Labelling

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1)

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

341 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0)

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

342 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 171. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C)

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

343 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 172. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

344 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

TO BE DONE (future edition)

Fig. 173. Post demodulation filter STM1

TO BE DONE (future edition)

Fig. 174. Post demodulation filter STM0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 175. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel interference

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

345 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 176. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital
interference

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

346 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fig. 177. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz digital
interference

TO BE DONE (future edition)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 178. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital
interference

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

347 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM1/128QAM

BER = 1 x 10 4

Mask for signature shape only

Fs=24.46 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 25.4 MHz ; Bc = 22.7 dB
Guaranteed signature: Kn = 0.9

(Kn = 0.49)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 179. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

348 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM1/128QAM

BER = 1 x 10 6

Mask for signature shape only

Fs=24.46 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 26 MHz ; Bc = 22 dB
Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.0

(Kn = 0.55)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 180. Typical signature for STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

349 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0/128QAM

BER = 1 x 10 4

Mask for signature shape only

Fs=8.15 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 31 dB
Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.3

(Kn = 0.55)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 181. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

350 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0/128QAM

BER = 1 x 10 6

Mask for signature shape only

Fs=8.15 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 29.3 dB
Guaranteed signature: Kn = 1.5

(Kn = 0.65)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 182. Typical signature for STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

351 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

352 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

MAINTENANCE

SECTION CONTENT

ED

955.203.292 Q
PAGE

Chapter 7 Maintenance
355

03

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

353 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

354 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7 MAINTENANCE
7.1 Introduction
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:

ROUTINE (preventive)
CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)

This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR
configuration, and and is organized as follows:

Warnings

EMC norms

Safety rules

Maintenance Personnel skill

on page 356, including:

Instruments and accessories

Software tools

System and Maintenance Tool Kits

on page 357, including:


on page 357
on page 358

Alarm Description
on page 361, including:

Centralized Equipment Alarms


on page 361

Station Alarms (TRU)


on page 363

Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)


on page 363

Alarm visual indications on units


on page 363

Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms


on page 364

Set of spare parts


on page 370, including:

Suggested Spare Parts


on page 370

General rules on spare parts management


on page 372

Spare Flash Card management


on page 372

Routine Maintenance
on page 373, including:

Routine Maintenance every year


on page 373

Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units


on page 374

Corrective Maintenance
on page 375, including:

General flowchart
on page 375

Alarm acknowledgment and attending


on page 376

TroubleShooting
on page 377

Unit replacement
on page 381

Faulty unit repair and Repair Form

ED

on page 357

on page 409

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

355 / 514

7.2.1 EMC norms

ATTENTION

EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
19.4.3 ON PAGE 493

7.2.2 Safety rules


The Safety Rules stated in para.19.3 on page 484 thru 490 describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment
safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.

SAFETY RULES

General
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical
connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Optical safety

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.19.3.4.2 on page 488.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

356 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.2 Warnings

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill


Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications.
Experience in maintenance activities is a must.
In particular, Maintenance Personnel must be familiar:

with the equipment this handbook refers to

and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.

Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.18.2
on page 466 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.

7.3 Instruments and accessories


7.3.1 Software tools
There is a local terminal (PCECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 79. on
page 468).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141:

connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit

through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated
to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out
by the PC.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

357 / 514

The following Tab. 59. lists the items contained in the LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[40] in
Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 59. LSY System Tool Kit
ITEMS

FACTORY P/N

NOTES

BAGS
Tool bag

810.704.305 W

Maintenance Tool bag

870.704.306 X
STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS

Fixed spanner 8 x 10

870.952.110 J

Fixed spanner 6 x 1

870.952.106 K

Fixed spanner 12 x 13

870.952.119 P

Screwdriver 3 x 100

870.959.130 V

Screwdriver 3.5 x 100

870.959.140 F

Screwdriver 5.5 x 200

870.959.166 V

Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60

870.959.530 W

Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80

870.959.540 G

Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250

870.959.565 V

Socket wrench

870.952.800 X

Socket wrench

870.952.995 E

Special screwdriver

870.959.815 Q

Torque wrench

870.952.302 X

Insulating plug with pliers

041.720.010 B
COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRISTBAND

Antistatic wristband

041.172.011 Y

Antistatic applications cord

041.911.001 U

Plug with crocodile pliers

041.172.010 B

Female button termination

248.501.099 Y

see Fig. 230.


on page 494

SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor

245.701.842 S

Electrical/Optical module extractor

241.901.305 V

Extractors holder bracket

241.901.306 W

see Fig. 184.


on page 360

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LABELS
Label for codebar

268.001.431 K

Label for codebar

268.001.702 G

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

358 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The following Tab. 60. lists the items contained in the LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT (for P/N see
REF.[41] in Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit
ITEMS

FACTORY P/N

NOTES

BAGS
Maintenance Tool bag

870.704.306 X

75ohm Transition

018.860.001 N

Coax. transition75 plugplug

018.860.002 P

Coax. transition 50 female Nmale SMA

040.198.018 M

Coax. transition 75 male BNCfemale1.6/5.6

040.198.103 Q

Coax. cord

041.962.184 T

Coax. cord

041.962.264 J

Coax. cord

041.962.276 N

Cord

041.997.010 X

Bipolar cord fitted with male connectors

049.911.081 U

Special cord for PRx measurement

041.992.608 K

see Fig. 183.


on page 359

SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor

245.701.842 S

Electrical/Optical module extractor

241.901.305 V

see Fig. 184.


on page 360

LABELS
Label for codebar

268.001.431 K

Label for codebar

268.001.702 G

plug M1 or M2
in Fig. 89. on page 167

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 183. Special cord for PRx measurement

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

359 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Extractor for Electrical/Optical module


and Fans Assembled Unit

Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor

Extractions holder bracket

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 184. Special extractors and holder bracket

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

360 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.4 Alarm Description


7.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms
All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in
Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate.
Specifically (see Fig. 185. herebelow):

Red LED URG (1): detection of an URGENT alarm

Red LED NURG (2): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm

Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.7.4.1.1 herebelow)

Yellow LED ABN (4): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.

Yellow LED IND (5): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm

(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red)


(2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red)
(3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow)
(4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow)
(5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow)
(7) Lamp Test Pushbutton
(8) Alarm storing Pushbutton
(Attended)

(6) bicolor led:


red on: Card failure alarm
green flashing: SW download in progress
(internal or toward other boards)
off: normal condition

Fig. 185. System Controller front view (particular)


N.B.

On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the
relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 61. herebelow.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins.

ED

Alarm severity terminology


on C.T. and O.S.

Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM


CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector pins

CRITICAL or MAJOR

URG , T*URG, T*RURG,

MINOR

NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG

WARNING

INDICATIVE

INDETERMINATE (not used)

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

361 / 514

7.4.1.1 Alarm Attending

the detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (8) on the System Controller unit.
This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG (1) (2) and will light up the yellow LED ATTD (3)
on the System Controller unit (Attended).

a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2).

when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.

7.4.1.2 Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See Tab. 63. on page 368.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

362 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See Fig. 185. on page 361:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU)


Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelfs
connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRUs connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm
lamps.
The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 186. herebelow.

RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
Fig. 186. Station Alarms on TRU
Their management is as follows:

The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released
(this last function is excludible).

The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant telealarm is
released (this last function is excludible).

The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.7.4.1.1 on page
362). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This
YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System
Controller unit (see para.7.4.1 on page 361).

The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm
criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.

The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRUs connectors (see
para.4.7.7 on page 208 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).

7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)


All details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the Alarm status procedure
in the Operators Handbook .

7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units


Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.7.4.1 on page 361, some other
equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of
the unit.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 65. on page 377 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

363 / 514

Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to
Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.4.7.8 on page 208.
The following Tab. 62. gives the relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm
primitives.
Tab. 63. on page 368 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms.
Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives
Remote alarm

Refer.

Remote Alarm primitives

TOR

ANDOR

VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure

TAND

ANDOR

VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure

TUP

GA2

SYSCO card fail or missing

URG

GA4

or of all urgent alarms

(severity = Major or Critical)

NURG

GA5

or of all not urgent alarms

(severity= Minor)

IND

GA6

or of all indicative alarms

(severity = Warning or
Indeterminate)

ABN

GA7

or of all the abnormal conditions

TORC

GA8

PSF1 or PSF2 card fail

TANC

GA9

PSF1 and PSF2 card fail

Opt STM1
module fail/missing

GA

or of the following alarms:


STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail
STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing

INT

GA10

or of all the internal alarms


card fail, card missing,
equipment mismatch, RC unreachable,
battery fail/missing,
LAN alarm,
transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded
software mismatch, software processing error,
housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment

FANS card fail/


missing

GA12

or of the following alarms:


FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling)
FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling)

SERV card fail/


missing

GA13

or of the following alarms:


Service card fail
Service card missing
TPHDEV card fail
TPHDEV card missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 62. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

364 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

.. continues Tab. 62.


Remote alarm

Refer.

Remote Alarm primitives

RRA
card fail/missing

GA16

N+0: or of the following alarms :


RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
N+1: or of the following alarms :
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card missing
RRASBY 0 card fail
RRASBY 0 card missing

MD card fail/missing

GA15

or of the following alarms :


MD X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
MD X (X = 0,..,9) card missing

TRI card fail/missing

GA11

or of the following alarms :


TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card fail
TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card missing
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing

HBER

GA17

or of highBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)

LBER

GA18

or of lowBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)

PSF1 card fail/


missing

GA 40

or of the following alarms:


PSF1 card fail
PSF1 card missing

PSF2 card fail/


missing

GA 41

or of the following alarms:


PSF2 card fail
PSF2 card missing

PSU
card fail/missing

GA 30

or of the following alarms:


PSU X (X=0,..,9) card fail,
PSU X (X=0,..,9) card missing

Second IF unit
card fail/missing

GA 42

or of the following alarms:


Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module missing

Third IF unit
card fail/missing

GA 43

or of the following alarms:


Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 62. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

365 / 514

.. continues Tab. 62.

CHX_affect
(X = 0,..,9)

Refer.

Remote Alarm primitives

CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and


CH1 = GA 21 affecting the traffic:
CH2 = GA 22
equipment alarms:
CH3 = GA 23
RRA X card fail
CH4 = GA 24
RRA X card missing
CH5 = GA 25
STM1 Opt. X card fail
CH6 = GA 26
STM1 Opt. X card missing
CH7 = GA 27
MD X card fail
CH8 = G A28
MD X card missing
CH9 = GA 29
Second IF (X.1) card fail
Second IF (X.1) card missing
Third IF (X.2) card fail
Third IF (X.2) card missing
TRI X card fail
TRI X card missing
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card fail
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card missing
RX X card fail
RX X card missing
PSU X card fail
PSU X card missing
sfwrEnvironmentProblem (RRA X, MD X, TRI X)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

communication alarms:
LOS
(STM1 Opt. X)
LOF
(STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterFailure (STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterDegraded (STM1 Opt. X)
LOF
(RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side)
modulationFail (MD X)
modLOS (MD X)
demodulationFail (MD X)
demLOS (MD X)
rxFail
(RX X)
txLOS
(TRI X)
txFail
(TRI X)
incompatibleTxPower (TRI X)
LOF
(RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1)
HBER
(MD X)
LBER
(MD X)
TIM
(RRA X)
RCIM
(RRA X)
atpcLoop (RRA X)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X)
rxDivFail (RX Div. X)
demDivLOS (Second IF X.1)
demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
Tab. 62. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

366 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Remote alarm

.. continues Tab. 62.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Remote alarm
CHX on protection
(X = 1,..,9)

Refer.

Remote Alarm primitives

CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting


CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on
CH3 = GA 33 protection)
CH4 = GA 34
CH5 = GA 35
CH6 = GA 36
CH7 = GA 37
CH8 = GA 38
CH9 = GA 39

end of Tab. 62.

N.B.

ED

Concerning the management of the remote alarms for 1+1 configuration, only the alarms raised
by the boards of the allowed channels have to be considered.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

367 / 514

Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms


For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 62. on page 364
Consequent Remote
Alarms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Remote Alarm

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

Station Alarm

TOR

HW

NURG

SW

TOR
RNURG

HW

TAND

HW

URG

HW

RURG

HW

TUP

HW

URG
INT

HW

RURG

HW

URG

SW

RURG

SW

NURG

SW

RNURG

SW

IND

SW

ABN

SW

ABN

SW

TORC

SW

NURG
INT

SW

RNURG

SW

TANC

HW

URG
INT

HW

RURG

HW

Opt. STM1
module fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

INT

SW

FANS
card fail

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

SERV
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

RRA
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

MD
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

Second IF unit
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

Third IF unit
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

TRI
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

PSF1
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

PSF2
card fail/missing

SW

URG/NURG/IND
INT

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

HBER

SW

URG/NURG/IND

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

Tab. 63. continues ..

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

368 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

.. continues Tab. 63.


LBER

SW

CHX_affect
(X=0..9)

SW

CHX on protection
(X=1..9)

SW

URG/NURG/IND

SW

RURG/
RNURG

SW

end of Tab. 63.

(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the
primary alarm.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

369 / 514

7.5 Set of spare parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin
unit, as detailed in following:

para.7.5.1.1 herebelow (all units, with exception of Transceivers)

para.7.5.1.2 on page 371 (Transceivers)


N.B.

The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance in this


chapter presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to the plugin
replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.:

with the same Part Numbers

and including the same babyboards (with the same Part Numbers)1.
with the aim of speedingup the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation
(baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or
babyboard damage.

7.5.1.1 All units, with exception of Transceivers


Tab. 64. Spare parts list
UNIT

DETAILS FOR P/Ns


AND
EQUIPPING RULES

BABY BOARDS

FANS ASSEMBLED
SYSCO

Tab. 29. on page 169


N.B.1
Tab. 16. on page 136

FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 page 372)


SERVICE

ADDITIONAL VOICE
(optional)

Tab. 18. on page 136

RRA CHANNEL
RRA STANDBY (if used)

Tab. 19. on page 137

OPTICAL MODULE (if used)


MODEM (STM0 or STM1)

Tab. 20. on page 138

PSU

Tab. 21. on page 138

PSF

Tab. 23. on page 139

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (if used)

Tab. 17. on page 136

N.B.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1 or 2 CANCCOMB
(STM0 or STM1) (optional)

As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted.
Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare
part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.

1. a policy is under study to supply Customers with spare units already equipped with baby boards,
according to Customers System configuration.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

370 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts

7.5.1.2 Transceivers

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Please refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for the detailed description of the Transceiver composition in the
various possible configurations.
a)

Spare Transceiver subassembly


Fig. 194. on page 396 shows the Transceiver assembly supplied as spare part. The assembly is
shown with the cover plate removed (see Fig. 80. on page 158).
There are two possibilities:
1)

Transceiver + Main Receiver


This assembly includes the following components:

2)

standard components:

Transceiver box with covers (see Fig. 80. on page 158)

RT control

Amplifier

Up Converter

Delay Line

DC/DC Converter
The P/N of this assembly is frequency dependent.

Main Receiver
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.

Transceiver only
This assembly includes the standard components cited above, but does not contain the Main
Receiver, whose spare must be provisioned as individual item (see point c ) herebelow).

This assembly (Transceiver + Main Receiver or Transceiver only does not include the following
subcomponents:

b)

RX Local Oscillator
TX Local Oscillator

see point b ) herebelow

Diversity Receiver

see point c ) herebelow

Frequency Reuse kit module

see point d ) herebelow

Spare Local Oscillator subassembly


Fig. 191. on page 390 shows the Local Oscillator subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.

c)

Spare Main and Diversity Receiver subassembly


The Main Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part in the case the spare Transceiver
subassembly is supplied without the Main Receiver already assembled inside.
The Diversity Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part only in Diversity configurations.
Fig. 192. on page 392 shows the Receiver subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.

d)

Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This spare is necessary only in Frequency Reuse configurations.


Fig. 193. on page 395 shows the Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency independent.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

371 / 514

7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management

It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:

the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;

the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);

if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the
replaced one.

7.5.3 Spare Flash Card management


Please refer to para.5.2.7 on page 280 for the Flash Card description.
The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left as it is for its possible
use as spare part.
ATTENTION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific
instructions given in the Operators Handbook (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW
download through SIBDL application).
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is
inserted as it is in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelfs slot),
the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the Systems EC,
RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

372 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.6 Routine Maintenance


Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operators Handbook, allows this function.

7.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year


It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
[1]

Mechanical checks
Check that:

the power supply units,

the coaxial cables,

the waveguides,

the mounting fixtures


are connected correctly.

[2]

Grounding check
Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded.

[3]

Power cables check

SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Make these operations:

Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.

Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

[4]

ED

Operative checks

Visual check:

During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 65. on
page 377

Check of the following functions:

Automatic switches

Alarms

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

373 / 514

Software checks
Use the Craft Terminal to check the system status (see the Operator Handbook). Access the
reference Network Element, select HISTORY DISPLAY, read the alarm history memory, the statuses,
and forcings.

7.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units


The MTBF of the Fans Assembled Unit equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below
1650SMC shelf) is about 20 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are
in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point 6.7.2 on page 333). Even though the
operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation
every three years:

pull out Fans Assembled Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

374 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

[5]

7.7 Corrective Maintenance

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

If not yet done, please read N.B. on page 370.

7.7.1 General flowchart


START
Alarm acknowledgment and attending
(para.7.7.2 page 376)

TroubleShooting starting with visual indications


(para.7.7.3.1 page 377)

Other measures

TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal


(para.7.7.3.2 page 379).
Identification of a unit to be replaced.

Unit replacement
(para.7.7.4 page 381).

System check via Craft Terminal


try again with
another unit

Fault repaired ?

Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system
and perform system check via Craft Terminal,
to verify that is really faulty
possible intermittent
failure

N
fixed fault ?
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together


with Repair Form compiled (para.7.8 page 409)

END
Fig. 187. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

375 / 514

7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending

locally (in front of the equipment or in the station):

when the URG/NURG/IND/ABN LED alarm on SYSCO unit lights up (see para.7.4.1 on page
361)

or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see
para.7.4.2 on page 363) or similar remote device

and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 65. on page 377 are not in normal status.

remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para.7.4.1.1 on page 362). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

376 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The need for Operator intervention is notified:

7.7.3 TroubleShooting

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.7.3.1 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications


Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 65. In any case, the
inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit replacement.
Refer to Fig. 188. on page 378 to carry out this procedure.
Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units

TRU SHELF
UNIT
TRU

FIGURE

LED

Fig. 186. on page 363

all

NORMAL
STATUS
OFF

BASE BAND SHELF board area


UNIT

FIGURE

LED

NORMAL
STATUS

System Controller

Fig. 185. on page 361

(6) bicolor

OFF

Service

Fig. 69. on page 145

(10) red

OFF

RRACHANNEL and
RRASTANDBY (09)

Fig. 71. on page 148

(1) red

OFF

Modem (09)

Fig. 75. on page 152

(1) red

OFF

PSU (09)

Fig. 76. on page 153

(2) green

ON

PSF (01)

Fig. 76. on page 153

(4) green

ON

BASE BAND SHELF access area


UNIT
Additional Housekeeping

FIGURE

LED

Fig. 77. on page 154

(1) red

NORMAL
STATUS
OFF

TRANSCEIVER SHELF
UNIT

Transceiver (09)

FIGURE

LED

NORMAL
STATUS

(1) green

ON

(2) red

OFF

Fig. 89. on page 167

FAN SHELF (01)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

UNIT
FANS Assembled (01)

ED

FIGURE

LED

Fig. 93. on page 172

(1) red

NORMAL
STATUS
OFF

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

377 / 514

Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 3.6.2.1 page 142).
START

any PSU green


led off ?

one or both PSF


green led off ?

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

verify circuit breakers on TRU


(see para.3.4 on page 128)

Y
PSU switch on ?

problem solved?
N
N
PSF probably faulty

PSU probably faulty

why ?
solve problem

SYSCO card fail on


(led (6) red)?
N
perform lamp test
(para 3.6.2.1 page 142)

N
OK ?
Y

carry out procedure in


para.7.7.3.4 page 380

try login NE by Craft Terminal

N
login successful ?
carry out procedure in
para.7.7.3.3 page 379

carry out procedure in


para.7.7.3.2 page 379

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 188. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

378 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.7.3.2 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal


The 9600LSY LHR equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to
service, activate and troubleshoot the equipment.
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the Alarm status procedure in the Operator Handbook (section
Maintenance).
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system.
Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.7.7.4 on page 381).

7.7.3.3 Problems with the Craft Terminal


Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:

Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on).

With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
Port

Physical

COM1

ON

in the MSWindows

OSI or
Logical
ON

Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface

If Physical is OFF, the problem can be due to:

CT physical port faulty

SYSCOs Finterface port faulty

the cable

If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CTF interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on
page 380.

If OSI/Logical is OFF, the problem can be due to:

FLASH CARD missing on SYSCO unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SYSCO faulty

SAMs Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

379 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is redon (led (6) in Fig. 185. on page 361), (or it is off, but
lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application:

responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal
application

does not respond (login unsuccessful):

ED

1)

push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 67. on page 141) and wait 3 minutes;

2)

if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;

3)

if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit,
as described in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384;

4)

if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption
of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its
replacement, as indicated in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

380 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.7.3.4 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on

7.7.4 Unit replacement

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.7.4.1 Introduction
The general procedure is described in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382.
This procedure is fully applicable, without additional instructions, to the following types of units:

SERVICE

RRACHANNEL

RRASTANDBY

PSF

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (taking into account its different housing and fixing by bolts, as
depicted in Fig. 77. on page 154).

Additional instructions/cautions are given for the following types of units:

PSU , in para.7.7.4.3 on page 383

SYSCO , in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384

FLASH CARD (housed on SYSCO unit), in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384

MODEM , in para.7.7.4.6 on page 385

TRANSCEIVER
Two cases must be distinguished:

a spare Transceiver already assembled is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly
equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced; in this case proceed as
specified in para.7.7.4.7 on page 386.

Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2


on page 371; in this case proceed as specified in para.7.7.4.8 on page 387.

OPTICAL MODULE, in para.7.7.4.9 on page 407

FANS ASSEMBLED , in para.7.7.4.10 on page 408

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

For the operative instructions and physical view of each board refer to the relevant paragraph of chapter
3 (list on page 121).

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

381 / 514

The replacement of a suspected faulty unit/module with one taken from the spare part stock must
be done in the following way:
1)

get the spare from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit/module
to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
If the unit to be replaced houses one or more babyboards, verify that the spare part does really
have the same babyboards as far as quantity and P/Ns (see Tab. 64. on page 370).
N.B.
In the case of SYSCO unit, the P/Ns matching of the ESCON subunit is not
important.

2)

disconnect all cables (and, before, protection cap, if present on the Optical module of RRA unit)
from the front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels
with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360)

3)

to extract a plugin board:

wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges

turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the breakage of levers

4)

only for RRA units: if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on
the spare part, extract it and mount it on the spare part (refer to para.7.7.4.9 on page 407 for
details)

5)

unit hardware presetting:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

operate the levers to extract the board

accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, check if the
board has hardware settings:

if no hardware settings are envisaged, go to next step 6 )

if hardware settings are envisaged:

locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document

set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be
replaced

6)

insert the spare plugin board in the system operating the levers

7)

now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

382 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.7.4.2 General procedure

8)

turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %


Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
9)

reconnect all cables (and, after, the protection cap, if were present on the Optical module of
RRA unit) on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.

10 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
N.B.

software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU
is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.

11 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.

7.7.4.3 PSU replacement procedure


Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:
1)

as step 1 ) on page 382

2)

turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153):

of the spare PSU unit


and of the PSU unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels
connectors.

ED

3)

as steps 2 ) to 3 ) and 6 ) to 9 ) on page 382383

4)

turn on (position I ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153)

5)

as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

383 / 514

7.7.4.4 SYSCO replacement procedure

1)

as steps 1 ) to 3 ) on page 382

2)

extract the FLASH CARD from unit SYSCO (see Fig. 65. on page 140)

3)

unit hardware presetting:

accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, get the
relevant MSZZQ documents

get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches:

a)

set the dipswitches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these dipswitches
will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software herein contained
(programs and system configuration data)

b)

set the dipswitches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
some of these dipswitches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set, will
cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be taken
to switch defining service battery voltage

4)

reinsert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 66. on page
140)

5)

as steps 6 ) to 10 ) on page 382383

6)

check the system status by LED visual inspection


After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software
download from FLASH CARD toward SC, RC and SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by bicolor
LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 67. on page 141). At the end, all red LEDs on SYSCO
unit should be off.
N.B.

software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SC,
RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.

connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.

7)

7.7.4.5 FLASH CARD replacement procedure


The need for this replacement is described in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The FLASH CARD contains all system software.


Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 on page 372) must be done
following the specific instructions given in the C.T. Operators Handbook.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

384 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:

7.7.4.6 MODEM replacement procedure

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:


1)

as step 1 ) on page 382

2)

turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153) of the
PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.:

PSU0 for MD0

PSU1 for MD1

....

PSU9 for MD9


according to following Fig. 189.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
The successive insertion of the spare MODEM must be done without voltage at its connector
on the backplane. Only the powering on of the MODEM already pluggedin guarantees the
correct startup powering timing. If you insert the MODEM with its PSU switched on, you run
the risk of having subsequent indeterminate (and in some case unrecoverable) unit states.
1

2 3

S
Y
S
C
O

S
E
R
V

P
S
F
1

24 25

R
R
A
0

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

R
M
R
D
A
0
1

M
D
1

R
M
R
D
A
2
2

R
M
R
D
A
3
3

R
M
R
D
A
4
4

R M
R D
A 5
5

R
R
A
6

M
D
6

R M
R D
A 7
7

R M
R D
A 8
8

R M
R D
A 9
9

P
S
U
0

P
S
U
1

P
S
U
2

P
S
U
3

P
S
U
4

P
S
U
5

P
S
U
6

P
S
U
7

P
S
U
8

P
S
U
9

P
S
F
2

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 189. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement

ED

3)

as steps 2 ) to 9 ) on page 382383

4)

turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off

5)

as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

385 / 514

N.B.

This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, fully equipped with
internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be
replaced.

Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:


1)

as step 1 ) on page 382

2)

turn off (position O ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on
page 167):

of the spare TRANSCEIVER unit


and of the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels
connectors.
3)

as steps 2 ) to 9 ) on page 382383


N.B.

It is suggested to verify the correspondence between the spare unit with that to be
replaced as follows:

a)

put both Transceivers on a work bench

b)

wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges

c)

remove COVERPLATE A of both transceivers (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store tidely
cover and screws for successive mounting

d)

compare internal composition of transceivers (same types and same P/Ns)

e)

verify that dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see Fig. 85. on
page 161); if different, correct setting of spare unit

f)

restore COVERPLATE A of both transceivers


ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
The screw tightening torque for fixing the coverplate to the unit must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.

ED

4)

turn on (position I ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in
Fig. 89. on page 167)

5)

as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

386 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.7.4.7 TRANSCEIVER replacement procedure

7.7.4.8 TRANSCEIVER repair and replacement procedure

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

This procedure must be followed if Transceiver components are available as individual


spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2 on page 371.

CONVENTIONS
In the following Fig. 194. thru Fig. 201. the following conventions have been applied:

connectors and cables: each connector is denoted by a number and letter (e.g. 11A); the two
ends of a cable have the same number (e.g. 11A and 11B are the two connectors of the same
cable); all cables are twoconnector cables, with the exception of connector depicted in
Fig. 195. on page 399.
The instructions given in the following for the replacement of internal components require that
you consult the correct internal cabling diagram, that depends on the configuration:
Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration
FREQUENCY REUSE
DIVERSITY

TR HOUSING

Fig. 196. on page 403

LO MASTER

Fig. 198. on page 405

LO SLAVE

Fig. 200. on page 406

Fig. 197. on page 404

LO MASTER

Fig. 199. on page 405

LO SLAVE

Fig. 197. on page 404

Y
N

INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM

USAGE

the letter T indicates a screw metallic tap on an unused SMA connector.


ATTENTION: CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
The following rules must be strictly followed:
a)

Operator skills
For the operations described hereafter, repair Operator must have deep knowledge
and experience of electronic repair through subcomponents replacement.

b)

Protection against electrostatic discharges


During operations described hereafter, repair Operator must always wear the
antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure.

c)

The screw tightening torque for fixing the subcomponents to the unit must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %


Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.
d)

The SMA connector tightening torque for fixing coaxial cables to the
subcomponents must be:

812 kg x cm (0.8 1.2 Newton x m)


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Exceeding this value may result in subcomponents connector breaking.


e)

ED

Coaxial cable handling


Coaxial cables should be handled carefully avoiding any excessive bending which
could compromise their functionality.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

387 / 514

GENERAL FLOW CHART

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a ) Start of procedure (page 389):

Faulty Transceiver extraction from shelf

Faulty Transceiver opening

Replacement of

b ) Rx or Tx Local Oscillator (page 390)


c ) Diversity Receiver (page 392)
d ) Main Receiver (page 394)
e ) Frequency Reuse kit module (page 395)
f ) Transceiver + Main Receiver (page 396)
g ) Transceiver (page 401)

h ) End of procedure (page 402):

Repaired Transceiver preparing for insertion in shelf

Repaired Transceiver insertion in shelf and functional checks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 190. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

388 / 514

Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a)

Start of procedure
Proceed as follows:
FAULTY TRANSCEIVER EXTRACTION FROM SHELF
1)

on the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced, turn off (position O ) the switch on the
unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167)
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and
backpanels connectors.

2)

as steps 2 ) and 3 ) on page 382

FAULTY TRANSCEIVER OPENING


3)

put the Transceiver to be repaired on a work bench

4)

remove COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 80. on page 158) of the Transceiver to be


repaired. Store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.

NEXT STEP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5)

ED

the procedure proceeds according to the component to be replaced:

Rx or Tx Local Oscillator

go to step b ) on page 390

Diversity Receiver

go to step c ) on page 392

Main Receiver

go to step d ) on page 394

Frequency Reuse kit module go to step e ) on page 395

Transceiver + Main Receiver go to step f ) on page 396

Transceiver

go to step g ) on page 401

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

389 / 514

Replacement of Rx or Tx Local Oscillator


The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 191. herebelow.
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10B or 12B)

P/N and
Remote Inventory

SMA CONNECTORS

A1

A3
A2

MMCX CONNECTOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 191. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly


N.B.

A1, A2, A3 show the position of the three screws fixing the Local Oscillator to
the Transceiver.

The SMA connectors are used differently according to the use as Rx or Tx LO


and according to the Transceiver configuration. SMA connectors are for
mounting coaxial cables by screwed connectors.
The unused SMA connectors must be closed by suitable metallic screw taps.

MMCX connector is used to house a cable connector that is inserted/extracted


simply pushing into or pulling out.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

390 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

b)

Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1)

according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps

CHOICE OF UNIT TO REPLACE


2)

verify which LO must be replaced (Rx or Tx). Operate on that, in the following steps

FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION


3)

turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)

4)

pull out cable from MMCX connector

5)

pull out flat cable from suitable connector

6)

turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO; store tidely screws for successive
mounting

SPARE UNIT PREPARATION


7)

get the spare LO from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch
the electronic components.
N.B.

8)

Rx and Tx Local Oscillators must have the same P/N

dismount the metallic screw taps present on SMA connectors of faulty LO and mount
them on the same SMA connectors of the spare LO
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque

SPARE UNIT INSERTION


9)

position spare LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3

10 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector


11 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position)
12 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

13 ) go to step h ) on page 402

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

391 / 514

Replacement of Diversity Receiver


The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. herebelow.
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE

SMA CONNECTOR
A2

A1

A4

A5

A3

A6

A8

A7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

c)

A9

P/N and
Remote Inventory

Fig. 192. Spare Receiver subassembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

A1 to A9 show the position of the three screws fixing the Diversity Receiver
to the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER

The SMA connector is for mounting coaxial cable by screwed connector.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

392 / 514

Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1)

according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps

FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION


2)

turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A)

3)

pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A)

4)

turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely screws for
successive mounting

SPARE UNIT PREPARATION


5)

get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not
touch the electronic components.

SPARE UNIT INSERTION


6)

position spare Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9

7)

push flat cable into Receivers suitable connector (7A)

8)

turn on cables connectors on Receivers SMA connector (6A)


See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque

NEXT STEP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9)

ED

go to step h ) on page 402

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

393 / 514

d)

Replacement of Main Receiver


The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. on page 392.

REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM


1)

according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps

EXTRACTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped)


2)

turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A)

3)

pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A)

4)

turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely the Diversity
Receiver and its screws for successive mounting

FAULTY MAIN RECEIVER EXTRACTION


With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403:
5)

remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
for successive mounting

6)

turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)

7)

pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)

8)

turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws for
successive mounting

SPARE MAIN RECEIVER PREPARATION


9)

get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not
touch the electronic components.
N.B.

Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N

SPARE MAIN RECEIVER INSERTION


With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403:
10 ) position spare Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
11 ) push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)
12 ) turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
13 ) position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)
INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) above:
14 ) position Diversity Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
15 ) push flat cable into Diversity Receivers suitable connector (7A)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

16 ) turn on cables connectors on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A)


See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP
17 ) go to step h ) on page 402

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

394 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Proceed as follows:

e)

Replacement of Frequency Reuse kit module


The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 193. herebelow.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

A1
P/N
CONNECTOR FOR
FLAT CABLE (10C)
A3

A2

SMA CONNECTOR (8B)

SMA CONNECTOR (9A)

A4

Fig. 193. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly


N.B.

A1 to A4 show the position of the three screws fixing the Frequency Reuse kit
module to to the Transceiver

The SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connector.
Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
1)

according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps

FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION


2)

turn off cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA
connectors (8B and 9A)

3)

pull out flat cable from suitable connector (10C)

4)

turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module; store tidely screws for successive
mounting

SPARE UNIT PREPARATION


5)

get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not
touch the electronic components.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SPARE UNIT INSERTION


6)

position spare module inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4

7)

push flat cable into modules suitable connector (10C)

8)

turn on cables connectors on modules SMA connectors (8B and 9A)


See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque

NEXT STEP
9)

ED

go to step h ) on page 402

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

395 / 514

Replacement of Transceiver + Main Receiver


The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 194. herebelow.
1A

MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)

2A

PLATE COVERING
MAIN RECEIVER

4A*

5B*

3A*

1B

12A

10B
10A

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

f)

12B

2B

* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403


Fig. 194. Spare Transceiver + Main Receiver subassembly
This subassembly includes just the internal cabling necessary for the basic configuration
(i.e. without diversity and without frequency reuse); this internal cabling corresponds to
that depicted in Fig. 196. on page 403.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In few words, the procedure (that is detailed in the following) consists of:

ED

remotion from the faulty transceiver of the standard components:

Rx and Tx Local Oscillators

remotion from the faulty transceiver of the optional components, if equipped:

Diversity Receiver and associated cabling

Frequency Reuse kit module and associated cabling

insertion into the spare transceiver and cabling of:

the standard components

and the optional components, if were equipped in the faulty transceiver

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

396 / 514

Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1)

according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps

PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER


2)

get the spare spare Transceiver + Main Receiver (Fig. 194. on page 396) from the
spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced
(N.B.); see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions; do not touch the electronic
components.
N.B.
the P/N label position is shown in Fig. 80. on page 158. This P/N is just
that of the Transceiver only. If you wish to verify also the Main Receiver
P/N, you should dismount it and then remount as indicated here, with
reference to Fig. 196. on page 403:

remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and
screws for successive mounting

turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)

pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)

turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws
for successive mounting

now you can check the Main Receiver P/N (see Fig. 192. on page 392)

position Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ...
A9

push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)

turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)


See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque

position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)

3)

remove spare Transceivers COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store
tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.

4)

accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, locate


the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document (the
dipswitch position is shown also in Fig. 85. on page 161) and set these switches
on the spare Transceiver exactly as they are set on the faulty Transceiver

REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and Fig. 196. on page 403
(transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on both Rx and Tx Local Oscillators as
follows:

ED

5)

turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)

6)

pull out cable from MMCX connector

7)

pull out flat cable from suitable connector

8)

turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO

9)

store tidely Rx and Tx Local Oscillators and their screws for successive mounting
N.B.
Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is
different from each other

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

397 / 514

REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)

10 ) DO NOT remove cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector


6A
11 ) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 7A
12 ) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver together with the flat
cable 7A7B and the cable 6A6B connected to it; store tidely the assembly and
screws for successive mounting
INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN
RECEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver
as follows:
13 ) position the Diversity Receiver (together with the flat cable 7A7B and the cable
6A6B connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
14 ) position the flat cable 7A7B and insert its connector 7B according to cabling diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

15 ) position the cable 6A6B according to cabling diagram

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

398 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:

REMOTION OF FR KIT FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

With reference to Fig. 193. on page 395 (FR module drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
16 ) DO NOT remove cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA
connector (8B and 9A)
17 ) pull out flat cable from connector10C
18 ) disconnect connector 8A from Transceivers front plate
19 ) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module together with cables 8B8A and
9A9B connected to it
20 ) extract the 3connector flat cable 10A10B10C shown in Fig. 195. :

10C

10B

10A

Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly
21 ) if present (see Fig. 200. and Fig. 201. on page 406) disconnect connector 11A from
Transceivers front plate
22 ) store tidely for successive mounting:

the module together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it

its screws

the flat cable 10A10B10C

the cable 11A11B (if equipped)


INSERTION OF FR KIT INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER (if equipped)
Operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows:
23 ) With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403, remove flat cable 10A10B (it is no longer
necessary)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

24 ) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397:

ED

a)

insert flat cable 10A10B10C on Transceivers connectors 10A and 10B and
position cable end 10C according to cabling diagram

b)

if cable 11A11B was equipped, mount its connector 11A on Transceivers front
plate and position cable end 11B according to cabling diagram

c)

position module (together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it) inside
transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4

d)

push flat cable into modules connector 10C

e)

mount connector 8A on Transceivers front plate

f)

position cable end 9B according to cabling diagram

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

399 / 514

INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER + MAIN

With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and transceiver internal cabling
diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, mount the Rx and Tx Local Oscillators (previously
removed from faulty Transceiver) on the spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows:
N.B.

Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different


from each other

25 ) position LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3


26 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector
27 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position)
28 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
NEXT STEP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

29 ) go to step h ) on page 402

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

400 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

INSERTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS


RECEIVER

g)

Replacement of Transceiver

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The spare subassembly is similar to that shown in Fig. 194. on page 396. With respect to
it, the missing items are:

the Main Receiver

and the cables 4A4B and 5B5A that belong to the Receiver own part list
Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
1)

as step 1 ) on page 397

PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSCEIVER


2)

as steps 2 ) to 4 ) on page 397

REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER


3)

as steps 5 ) to 9 ) on page 397

REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)


4)

as steps 10 ) to 12 ) on page 398

REMOTION OF MAIN RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER


With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page
403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
5)

remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
for successive mounting

6)

DO NOT remove cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector 4B

7)

DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 5A

8)

turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver together with the flat cable
5A5B and the cable 4B4A connected to it; store tidely the assembly and screws
for successive mounting

9)

restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)

INSERTION OF MAIN RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER


With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page
403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on spare Transceiver as follows:
10 ) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
for successive mounting
11 ) position the Main Receiver (together with the flat cable 5A5B and the cable 4B4A
connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
12 ) position the flat cable 5A5B and insert its connector 5B according to cabling diagram
13 ) position the cable 4B4A according to cabling diagram
14 ) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
NEXT STEPS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

15 ) as steps 13 ) (page 398) thru 29 ) (page 400)

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

401 / 514

End of procedure
Proceed as follows:
REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER PREPARING FOR INSERTION IN SHELF
1)

restore COVERPLATE A of repaired Transceiver (see Fig. 80. on page 158)

2)

verify that, on the repaired Transceivers front panel, the switch pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on
page 167 is turned off (position O )
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
For the high current absorbed by the unit, its insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and
backpanels connectors.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER INSERTION IN SHELF AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS

ED

3)

as steps 6 ) to 9 ) on page 382383

4)

turn on (position I ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1)
in Fig. 89. on page 167)

5)

as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

402 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

h)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE

main receiver
1A

2A

T1

4A

T3 T4

3A

4B

5A

5B

1B

T7

T8

Tx LO

Rx LO

plate covering
main receiver

T6

10A

10B

2B

12A

12B

3B

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 196. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

403 / 514

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE

T3
1A

2A

6B

T4

4A*

T6

3A*

T7

T8

6A

Tx LO

Rx LO

diversity receiver

7A

1B
5B*

* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403

10B

7B
10A

2B

12B
12A

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 197. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 2/6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

404 / 514

WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9A
8A

1A

2A

10C
T1

4A*

9B

3A*
T6

T3

T8

T7

8B

Tx LO

Rx LO

5B*

1B

10A

10B

2B

12A

12B

* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403


Fig. 198. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 3/6

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER


(differences with Fig. 198. above)
6B instead of T1

6A

Rx LO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

diversity receiver

7A

Tx LO

7B

Fig. 199. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 4/6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

405 / 514

WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE

11A

1A

2A

T1

T4

4A*

Rx LO

5B*

1B

T6

3A*

T7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

11B
T8

Tx LO

10A

10B

2B

12A

12B

* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403

Fig. 200. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 5/6

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE


(differences with Fig. 200. above)
6B instead of T1

6A

Rx LO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

diversity receiver

7A

Tx LO

7B

Fig. 201. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 6/6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

406 / 514

7.7.4.9 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:


N.B.

In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not
necessary to extract the unit from the shelf.

1)

as step 1 ) on page 382

2)

disconnect cables from the module (and, before, the protection cap, if present on the Optical
module). Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with
writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360)

3)

turn off the two screws fixing the module

4)

extract the module

5)

insert the spare module and fix it turning on the two screws
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.

ED

6)

reconnect cables to the module (and, after, fix the protection cap, if it was present on the
Optical module).

7)

as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

407 / 514

7.7.4.10 Fans Assembled Unit replacement in case of alarm


Considerations about MINOR and MAJOR alarms
Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Assembled Unit arises, you should be aware of the following:

the alarm can be:

MINOR for the failure of one fan only of the unit;

MAJOR for the failure of two, three or of all the fours fans of the unit;

this condition should be considered in conjunction with:

the rackhousingroom effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration


that the loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside the rack;

and the temperature limits specified in para.6.7.1 on page 333.


because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.

In conclusion:

the Fans Assembled Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate intervention;
nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting
a very long time.
the Fans Assembled Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.

[2]

Replacement procedure
1)

as step 1 ) on page 382

2)

Remove FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning off the six screws

3)

wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination
to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges

4)

Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor (see Fig. 184. on
page 360) inside the units suitable hole (see Fig. 93. on page 172)

5)

Insert the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT

6)

now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit

7)

Restore FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning on the six screws
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
The screw tightening torque must be:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %


Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
8)

ED

check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

408 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

[1]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form


7.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only.
According to the policy (under study) described in footnote <1.> on page 370, the units with babyboards
(see Tab. 64. on page 370) must be sent back to the repair center together with their babyboards, without
dismounting them from the assembly.

7.8.2 Repair Form filling


To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 202. on
page 410.
The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

409 / 514

ALCATE L

REPAIR FORM
CUSTOMER NAME

ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER

SITE

BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY

SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT

PRODUCT RELEASE

STATION/RACK

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER

SUBRACK

SLOT

MNEMONIC

ALCATEL PART NUMBER

SERIAL NUMBER

FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION

FAULT PHASE

REASON FOR REPAIR

PRESUMED CAUSE

INSTALLATION /
TURN ON

CLEAR FAULT

DROP IN PERFORMANCE

OPERATION

INTERMITTENT FAULT

UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT

INTERNAL

LIGHTNING

EXTERNAL

MAINTENANCE

AIR COND.

TEMPERATURE FAULT

OTHER

DATE

NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT


AFTER REPAIR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR

COMMENTS

PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND

FAULTS DETECTED

UPGRADE
A

STANDARD REPAIRING

SOLDERING /
WIRING
I

NOT REPAIRABLE
(REJECTED)

FL

MECHANICAL
M

BD

ADJUSTMENT

COMPONENT
C
PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
V1

P
DIRT

V1

V2

SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT

CORROSION
I

OTHER

SX

V3

NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE

COMMENTS

DATE

REPAIRING NUMBER

REPAIRING CENTRE

NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

Fig. 202. Repair form

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

410 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SECTION CONTENT

ED

PAGE

Chapter 8 Introduction to section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers

413

Chapter 9 9640LSY

415

Chapter 10 9647LSY

425

Chapter 11 9662LSY

429

Chapter 12 9667LSY

433

Chapter 13 9674LSY

435

Chapter 14 9681LSY

447

Chapter 15 9610LSY

453

Chapter 16 9611LSY

455

Chapter 17 9613LSY

459

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

411 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

412 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS


In this section, the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent items
(transceiver components) are given.
The transceiver components are described in para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161.
N.B. : for frequencyindependent items please refer to Tab. 13. on page 122.
Moreover, the channel plans utilized with 9600 LSY radios and criteria to be taken into account for the
use of each specific one are described, according to the following general notes:
The main parameters affecting the choice of radiofrequency channel arrangements, according to ITUR
Rec. F.746, are :
CS

Channel Separation between two consecutive centre frequencies for the related alternated
radiofrequency channel arrangement: it is also considered equal to the Channel Bandwidth.

XS

defined as the radiofrequency separation between the centre frequencies of adjacent


radiofrequency channels on the same polarization and in the same direction of transmission: so
XS is equal to twice the CS for the alternated radio frequency channel arrangement and is equal
to the CS for the cochannel band reuse radio frequency channel arrangement (please consider
that an alternated frequency channel arrangement may be further implemented with cochannel
band reuse).

DS

Tx/Rx Duplex Spacing, defined as the radiofrequency separation between corresponding go and
return channels, constant for each couple of ith and ith frequencies, within a given channel
arrangement.

defined as the frequency of the centre of the band of frequencies occupied.

fr

reference frequency of the homogeneous pattern.

Main spectrum utilization characteristics for each frequency band of the 9600 LSY family are summarized
in Tab. 67. on page 414.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency
reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals on a
single RF channel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

413 / 514

SYSTEM

9640 LSY
(L4)

9647 LSY
(U4)

9662 LSY
(L6)
9667 LSY
(U6)

9674 LSY

9681 LSY

9610 LSY

9611 LSY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9613 LSY

ED

FREQUENCY
(GHz)

ITUR
FREQ. PLAN

CHANNEL
SPACING
(MHz)

SDH
TRANSPORT

3.64.2

ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1


fig.3

40

STM1

3.64.2

ITUR F.635 recommends


1 (Finland)

40

STM1

3.84.2

ITUR F.382

29

STM1

3.84.2

ITUR F.382 extended

29

STM1

3.64.2

DTI (United Kingdom)

28

STM1

3.64.2

ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1


fig.6

30

STM1

3.43.9

OIRT

28

STM1

4.45.0

ITUR F.1099635 ANNEX


1 fig.2

40

STM1

4.45.0

Spain Defence
Department

28

STM1

29.65

STM1

5.9256.425

ITUR F.383, CEPT T/R


1401

5.6756.179

OIRT

28

STM1

6.4257.11

ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R


1402

40

STM1

7.117.44

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L

28

STM1

7.447.75

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H

28

STM1

7.4287.897

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4

14 28

STM0 / STM1

7.4257.725

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1

28

STM1

7.117.44

ITUR F.385 rec. 1L

14 28

STM0 / STM1

7.247.56

ITUR F.385 rec. 1M

14 28

STM0 / STM1

7.417.74

ITUR F.385 rec. 1H

14 28

STM0 / STM1

7.7258.275

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1

29.65

STM1

8.2758.5

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3

14 28

STM0 / STM1

7.98.4

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4

14 28

STM0 / STM1

MEDIASET

28

STM1

10.711.7

ITUR F.387 rec. 1

40

STM1

10.711.7

ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2

40

STM1

14 28

STM0 / STM1

10.02810.630

12.75 13.25

ITUR F.497 rec. 1

CHAPTER

9 on page
415

10 on
page 425

11 on
page 429
12 on
page 433

13 on
page 435

14 on
page 447
15 on
page 453
16 on
page 455
17 on
page 459

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

414 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Tab. 67. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9 9640LSY
9.1 9640LSY part list
Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9640LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB02524AA

411200543

4L128T

3,44,2 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB02513AA

474210265

4L128R

16

9640LSY L.O.

3DB02668AA

474210292

4LLO

16

9640LSY OIRT L.O.

3DB02667AA

474210291

4LLOOIR

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

415 / 514

The possible channel plans to be used with 9640LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 3.6 to 4.2 GHz
or 3.8 to 4.2 GHz bands, are shown in the figures from Fig. 203. to Fig. 209. :

Channel plan A) is completely defined by the fig.3/Annex 1 of ITUR Recommendation F.635.


Channel plan B) is derived from the general formula defined in recommends 1 of the same
Recommendation.
Channel plan C) ) is completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.382.
Channel plan D) is an extended plan derived from the same Recommendation
Channel plan E) is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade and Industry).
Channel plan F) is defined in ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex I, fig.6,
Channel plan G) is a specific channel plan for the OIRT (Russia)

Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans with alternate polarized channels.
It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
Channel plans A and B
See Fig. 203. on page 418 and Fig. 204. on page 419.
Both channels are based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9640LSY can work in frequency
reuse operation (CCDP) by utilization of XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 14xSTM1 signals,
the maximum system configuration being 2 x (6 + 1). In this case each RF channel is contemporary
used on H and V polarization, requiring double Polarises antennas. The minimum frequency distance
between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz.
All the odd and even channels can be connected to the same antenna polarization.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM 1 per RF frequency, channel plan A) and B) allow
the use of a single Polarises antenna up to a 6+1 system configurations .
Channel plan C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Channel plan in Fig. 205. on page 420 is completely defined, for the exploitation of the 3.84.2 GHz
band, by ITUR Recommendation F.382, fig.3, with the center frequency by recommends 6 (or
recommends 5, for the interleaved channels).

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

416 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9.2 9640LSY frequency plans

Channel plan D

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See Fig. 206. on page 421.


This channel plan is used in certain countries, where the 3.63.8 GHz band is also available, to allows
the exploitation of the 3.64.2 band by the addition of three RF channels. This channel plan then
allows, theoretically, the use of a system with 9 go and return channels, but the actual limit of the
9600LSY system is of using separately channels from A to C with an up to 2+1 system or channels
from 1 to 6 with an up to 5+1 system.
Channel plans are based on a frequency channel spacing of 29 MHz and 9640LH may work in
frequency reuse operation (CCDP) up to 2x(5+1) system configuration.
In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring double
polarized antennas .
In case of simple transmission of a single STMI per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of
a single Polarises antenna up to a 2+ 1 system configuration (using double Polarises antennas the
limit is 5+1).
These limits are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same
branching, equal to 58 MHz in this case and from the maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection
system
Channel plan E
Channel plan in Fig. 207. on page 422 is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade
and Industry). This channel plan is based on 28 MHz channel spacing. Limit for a multichannel
system is 4+1, using single polarized antenna, and 7+1 using double polarized antenna. These limits
are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal
to 56 MHz in this case, and from the maximum of 7+ l of the multichannel protection system.
Channel plan F
Channel plan in Fig. 208. on page 423 has been recently defined (January 97) in ITUR
Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6, for the exploitation of the 3.64.2 GHz band and adopted
by Italian administration.
It allows 9 go and return channels spaced 30 MHz with a centre gap of 80 MHz.
9640LH can work in this plan with frequency reuse operation (CCDP), by means of the XPIC unit,
allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel [up to 2x(7+1)]. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring double polarized antennas.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM I per RF frequency, channel plans in Figure 15. at
page 53 allows the use of up to a 4+1 system configuration on a single polarized antenna . Using
double polarized antennas the limit is 7+1 (these limits are derived from the minimum distance
between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal to 60 MHz in this case, and from the
maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection system).
Channel plan G

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Channel plan shown in Fig. 209. on page 424 is used in Russia and is defined by OIRT. It is based
on 28 MHz channel spacing and can be used also in CCDP operation.
Limits for a multichannel system are 3+1 using single polarized antenna and 7+1 using double
polarized antenna.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

417 / 514

9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

H (V)
V (H)

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

3620

3940

3660

3980

3700

4020

3740

4060

3780

4100

3820

4140

3860

4180

3700

3620

3780

2
3

3660

3860

4020

3940

6
5

3740

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM1
ITUR F 635
CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0320+40n
fn=f0+40n,
f0=3900,
n : from 1 to 7

2
7

3820

4100

3980

4180

6
5

4060

4140

f0 = 3900

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

418 / 514

9640 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.635 recommends 1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F 635
STM1
CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0320+40n
fn=f0+40n,
f0=3890,
n : from 1 to 7
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

3610

3930

3650

3970

3690

4010

3730

4050

3770

4090

3810

4130

3850

4170

3610

H (V)
V (H)

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

3690

3770

4
3

3650

3850

6
5

3730

3970

1
7

3810

4050

3
2

3930

4130

4010

5
4

4090

4170

f0 = 3890

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.635 recommends 1

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

419 / 514

NORMAL CHANNELS

INTERLEAVED CHANNELS

ITUR F.382
STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5
n : from 1 to 6

ITUR F.382
STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=3989
n : from 1 to 6

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

3824,5

4037,5

3810

4023

3853,5

4066,5

3839

4052

3882,5

4095,5

3868

4081

3911,5

4124,5

3897

4110

3940,5

4153,5

3926

4139

3969,5

4182,5

3955

4168

H (V)
V (H)

2
1

4
3

6
5

2
1

4
3

6
5

f0 = 4003.5
N.B.

Note: Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
correspondent main plan channel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR Recommendation F.382

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

420 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR Recommendation F.382

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation


NORMAL CHANNELS

INTERLEAVED CHANNELS

ITUR F.382 EXTENDED


STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5
n : from 1 to 6

ITUR F.382 EXTENDED


STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=3989
n : from 1 to 6

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

3824,5

4037,5

3810,0

4023,0

3853,5

4066,5

3839,0

4052,0

3882,5

4095,5

3868,0

4081,0

3911,5

4124,5

3897,0

4110,0

3940,5

4153,5

3926,0

4139,0

3969,5

4182,5

3955,0

4168,0

f0=3703,5 MHz
fn=f0121+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
n : from 1 to 3

f0=3689 MHz;
fn=f0121+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
n : from 1 to 3

3611,5

3737,5

3597,0

3723,0

3640,5

3766,5

3626,0

3752,0

3669,5

3795,5

3655,0

3781,0

f0 = 3689
3611.5

H (V)
V (H)

3669.5

B
A

f0 = 3989
3766.5

A
C

f0 = 3703.5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

N.B.

3824.5

C
B

3882.5

2
1

3940.5

4
3

4037.5

6
5

4095.5

2
1

4153.5

4
3

6
5

f0 = 4003.5

Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
correspondent main plan channel.
Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

421 / 514

9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

3633

H (V)
V (H)

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

3633,0

3941,0

3661,0

3969,0

3689,0

3997,0

3717,0

4025,0

3745,0

4053,0

3773,0

4081,0

3801,0

4109,0

3829,0

4137,0

3857,0

4165,0

2
1

3745

3801

3717

3857

3997

2
9

3773

3941

3661

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

3689

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

DTI
STM1
CS=28
DS=308
fn=f0294+28n
fn=f0+14+28n,
f0=3899
n : from 1 to 9

4
5

4025

4165

4109

3969

3829

4053

4081

4137

f0 = 3899

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

422 / 514

9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F 635 Annex1 fig.6.


STM1
CS=30 DS=320
fn=f0310+30n
fn=f0+10+30n,
f0=3900
n : from 1 to 9
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

3620

H (V)
V (H)

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

3620

3940

3650

3970

3680

4000

3710

4030

3740

4060

3770

4090

3800

4120

3830

4150

2860

4180

3680

2
1

3740

4
3

3650

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

3800

3710

4000

2
9

3770

3940

6
5

3860

4180

4120

3970

3830

4060

4030

4090

4150

f0 = 3900

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

423 / 514

9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

H (V)
V (H)

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

3422,5

3688,5

3450,5

3716,5

3478,5

3744,5

3506,5

3772,5

3534,5

3800,5

3562,5

3828,5

3590,5

3856,5

3618,5

3884,5

3506.5

3562.5

3478.5

1
8

3534.5

3716.5

3618.5

3422.5

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

3450.5

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

O.I.R.T.
STM1
CS=28 DS=266
fn=f0310+30n
fn=f0+7+28n,
f0=3653,5
n : from 1 to 8

3590.5

3772.5

3
2

3688.5

3828.5

5
4

3744.5

3884.5

7
6

3800.5

3856.5

f0 = 3653.5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

424 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

10 9647LSY
10.1 9647LSY part list
Tab. 69. 9647LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9647LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB02526AA

411200545

4U128T

4,35,0 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB02512AA

474210264

4U128R

16

9647LSY L.O.

3DB02669AA

474210292

4ULO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

10.2 9647LSY frequency plans


In Fig. 210. and Fig. 211. the channel plans for the 9647LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation
of the 4.4 to 5.0 GHz band are shown.
The channel plan shown in Fig. 210. on page 426 is completely defined by the fig.2/Annex 1 of ITUR
Recommendation F.1099.
This channel plan is based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9647LSY can work with frequency
reuse operation (CCDP) allowing the transmission of 14xSTM1 signals [max system configuration
being 2 x (6 + 1)].
In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization, requiring double polarized
antennas.
The minimum frequency gap between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz and all
the odd and even channels can be connected to the same polarization of the antenna .
Note that, even in case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF carrier, this channel plan requires always
the use of double polarized antenna due to the different polarization of the go and return channel.
The channel plan shown in Fig. 211. on page 427 is a specific channel plan used in Spain by the Spanish
defence department and it is based on a 28 MHz channel spacing.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

425 / 514

9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

4430

4730

4470

4770

4510

4810

4550

4850

4590

4890

4630

4930

4670

4970

H (V)
(MHz)

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

4430

4510

2
1

4590

4
3

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM1
ITUR F 1099
CS=40 DS=310
fn=f0310+40n
fn=f010+40n,
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 7

4770

4670

6
5

4850

3
2

4930

5
4

7
6

V (H)

4470

4550

4630

4730

4810

4890

4970

f0 = 4700

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

426 / 514

9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM1 128 QAM


SPAIN DEFENCE
CS=28
DS=314
fn=f0307+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 9
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

4421

H (V)
V (H)

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

4421

4735

4449

4763

4477

4791

4505

4819

4533

4847

4561

4875

4589

4903

4477

2
1

4533

4589

4505

4645

4791

2
9

4561

4735

4449

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

4
5

4819

4959

4903

4763

4617

4847

4875

4931

f0 = 4700
N.B.

Channels 2, 8, 2, 8 are used for low capacity transmission only.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

427 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

428 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

11 9662LSY
11.1 9662LSY part list
Tab. 70. 9662LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9662LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

5,96,4 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB01264AA

411200518

6L128T

5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB01268AA

474210145

6+128R

16

9662LSY L.O.

3DB02670AA

474210294

6LLO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

11.2 9662LSY frequency plans


In Fig. 212. on page 430 the channel plan for the 9662LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 5.925 to 6.425 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan (based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITUR
Recommendation F.383, using the alternate polarization arrangement defined in recommend 3, and by
the CEPT T/R 1401.
Another feasible specific channel plan (based on 28 MHz channel spacing) for the OIRT (Russia) is shown
in Fig. 213. on page 431, allowing also the associated 14 MHz shifted pattern.
9662LSY may work in the above plans by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring an external double polarized antenna.
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single
polarized antenna up to 3+1/4+0 system configuration and using a double polarized antenna up to
7+1/8+0 system configuration.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

429 / 514

9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F 383

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

H (V)
V (H)

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

5945,20

6197,24

5974,85

6226,89

6004,50

6256,54

6034,15

6286,19

6063,80

6315,84

6093,45

6345,49

6123,10

6375,14

6152,75

6404,79

6004.50

6063.80

2
1

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

5945.20

5974.85

6123.10

6
5

6034.15

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F 383
STM1
fn=f0259.45+29.65n
fn=f07.41+29.65n
CS=29.65
DS=252.04
f0=6175
n: from 1 to 8

6197.24

6093.45

6152.75

6315.84

8
7

6256.54

6226.89

6375.14

6286.19

8
7

6345.49

6404.79

f0 = 6175

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F 383

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

430 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.

NORMAL CHANNELS

INTERLEAVED CHANNELS

O.I.R.T.
STM1
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
036 CS=28
DS=266
f0=5920
n: from 1 to 8

O.I.R.T.
STM1
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
CS=28
DS=266
f0=5934
n: from 1 to 8

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

5689

5955

5703

5969

5717

5983

5731

5997

5745

6011

5759

6025

5773

6039

5787

6053

5801

6067

5815

6081

5829

6095

5843

6109

5857

6123

5871

6137

5885

6151

5899

6165

H (V)

(MHz)

V (H)

4
3

6
5

8
7

2
1

4
3

6
5

8
7

f0 = 5920
N.B.

Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14 MHz higher than
correspondent main channel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

431 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

432 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

12 9667LSY
12.1 9667LSY part list
Tab. 71. 9667LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9667LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

6,47,1 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB01265AA

411200519

6U128T

5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB01268AA

474210145

6+128R

16

9667LSY L.O.

3DB02671AA

474210295

6ULO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

12.2 9667LSY frequency plans


In Fig. 214. on page 434 the channel plan for the 9667 LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 6.4 to 7.1 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan (based on 40 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITUR
Recommendation F.384 .
The only difference between the two plans is that in plan a) the go and return channels have different
polarization and in plan b) the polarization is the same.
In case of transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan a) requires the use of a double
polarized antenna even in case of 1+0 system, due to the different polarization of the Go and return
channel.
On the contrary, channel plan b) allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to 3+1 system
configuration (in both cases max system configuration is 7+1 using double polarized antenna).
9667LSY may work in the above plans by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

433 / 514

9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.384
STM1
CS=40 ; DS=340
fn=f0350+40n
fn=f010+40n
f0=6770
n : from 1 to 8
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

6460

6800

6500

6840

6540

6880

6580

6920

6620

6960

6660

7000

6700

7040

6740

7080

Channel plan a)
6540

6460

H (V)
V (H)

6620

4
3

6500

6700

6
5

6580

6840

6740

7000

6660

6920

6800

7080

7
6

6880

6960

7040

f0 = 6770
Channel plan b)
6540

6460

H (V)
V (H)

4
3

6500
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6620

6700

6
5

6580

6800

8
7

6660

6880

2
1

6740

6960

6840

7040

6920

8
7

7000

7080

f0 = 6770
Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

434 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

13 9674LSY
13.1 9674LSY part list
Tab. 72. 9674LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9674LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

7,17,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB02531AA

411200547

07128T

7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB02533AA

474210268

7+128R

16

9674LSY L.O.

3DB02672AA

474210296

07LO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

435 / 514

In the figures from Fig. 215. to Fig. 220. the possible channel plans for the 9674 LSY equipment to be
used for the exploitation of the 7.1 to 7.9 GHz bands are shown. These channel plans are all based on
ITUR Recommendation F.385, with the following details:

Fig. 215. on page 437: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H : based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of
transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 4+1/5+0
system configuration. Shifted pattern 14 MHz lower is available as well.
9674LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing
the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.

Fig. 216. on page 438: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 :It is used in UK and It is defined By DTI (Department
of Trade and Industry). Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single
STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0
system configuration and up to 7+1/8+0 using double polarized antennas.
9674LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing
the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
14 MHz channel spacing is available as well to support the STM0 signal.

Fig. 217. on page 440: ITUR F.385 Annex 1 :based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration and up to 3+1 using double polarized antennas, due
to the narrow distance between the innermost channels (42 MHz).
9674LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing
the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
Warning: because of the narrow distance between channels 8 and 1, with F. 385 Annex 1 channel
plan, the utilization of these channels connected to the same branching is not allowed.

Fig. 218. on page 441: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L


Fig. 219. on page 443: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M
Fig. 220. on page 445: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H
Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF
frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system and
of a double polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration.
This limit is due to the narrow frequency distance between the innermost channels (49 MHz), not
sufficient being these channels on the same antenna polarization.
Three shifted patterns 7 MHz higher are available as well.
LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) utilizing the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM0 signal. Shifted pattern (7 MHz higher)
is available as well.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

F385 Rec. 1M in particular supports the channel plan GPR11 (OIRTRussia) that utilizes
the channels 1int3, 2int3, 3int3, 4int3 and 5int3 (and correspondent 1int3, 2int3,
3int3, 4int3 and 5int3 return channels) as main channels and 1int1, 2int1, 3int1,
4int1 and 5int1 and (correspondent 1int1, 2int1, 3int1, 4int1 and 5int1 return
channels) as interleaved channels.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

436 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

13.2 9674LSY frequency plans

9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L


STM1
CS=28 DS=196
fn=f0182+28n
fn=f0+14+28n
f0=7275
n: from1 to 5
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H


STM1
CS=28 DS=196
fn=f0168+28n
fn=f0+28n
f0=7597
n: from1 to 5

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

1i

7107

1 i

7303

1i

7443

1 i

7611

7121

7317

7457

7625

2i

7135

2 i

7331

2i

7471

2 i

7639

7149

7345

7485

7653

3i

7163

3 i

7359

3i

7499

3 i

7667

7177

7373

7513

7681

4i

7191

4 i

7387

4i

7527

4 i

7695

7205

7401

7541

7709

5i

7219

5 i

7415

5i

7555

5 i

7723

7233

7429

7569

7737

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3L


7107

7163

7121

H (V)

7303

7317

7191

7149

7359

7205

7415

7373

7135

7233

V (H)

7219

7177

4
3

7331

f0 = 7275

7429

7387

7345

7401

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3H


7443

7457

H (V)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

V (H)

7499

7555

7513

7471

7485

7611

7625

4
3

7569

7541

7653

7737

4
3

7639

f0 = 7597

7723

7681

2
5

7527

7667

7695

7709

Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

437 / 514

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4


STM0
fn=f0241.5+14n
fn=f0+3.5+14n
CS=14 DS=245
f0=7662.5
n: from1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4


STM1
fn=f0248.5+28n
fn=f03.5+28n
CS=28 DS=245
f0=7662.5
n: from1 to 8

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7435

7680

7449

7694

7463

7708

7477

7722

7491

7736

7505

7750

7519

7764

7533

7778

7547

7792

10

7561

10

7806

11

7575

11

7820

12

7589

12

7834

13

7603

13

7848

14

7617

14

7862

15

7631

15

7876

16

7645

16

7890

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7442

7687

7470

7715

7498

7743

7526

7771

7554

7799

7582

7827

7610

7855

7638

7883

Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.385 Annex 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 216. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

438 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.385 Annex 4

... Fig. 216. continues

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0
7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7575

H (V)

V (H) 1

4
3

10

6
7

7603

12
11

7631

7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7589

15

7617

16

14
13

7680 7708 7736 7764 7792 7820

7645

4
3

10

6
7

7848 7876

12
11

13

7694 7722 7750 7778 7806 7834

16

14

15

7862 7890

f0 = 7662.5

STM1
7498

7442

H (V)
V (H)

7554

2
3

7470

7610

6
5

7526

7687

8
7

7582

7743

2
1

7638

7799

4
3

7715

7855

6
5

7771

8
7

7827

7883

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f0 = 7662.5

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

439 / 514

9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.385 Annex 1

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

7442

7596

1i

7456

1 i

7610

7470

7624

2i

7484

2 i

7638

7498

7652

3i

7512

3 i

7666

7526

7680

4i

7540

4 i

7694

7554

7708

5i

7568

5 i

7722

7498

7456

H (V)
V (H)

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

7442

7554

7512

7596

7484

7526

7652

7610

7470

7568

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1


STM1
fn=f0161+28n
fn=f07+28n
CS=28 DS=154
f0=7575
n: from1 to 5

7624

7722

7540

7708

7666

7638

7680

7694

f0 = 7575

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.385 Annex 1

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

440 / 514

9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L


STM0
fn=f0161+14n
fn=f0+14n
CS=14 DS=161
f0=7275
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L


STM1
fn=f0175+28n
fn=f014+28nn
CS=28 DS=161
f0=7275
n : from 1 to 5

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7128

7289

7128

7289

1i

7135

1 i

7296

1int1

7135

1int1

7296

7142

7303

1int2

7142

1int2

7303

2i

7149

2 i

7310

1int3

7149

1int3

7310

7156

7317

7156

7317

3i

7163

3 i

7324

2int1

7163

2int1

7324

7170

7331

2int2

7170

2int2

7331

4i

7177

4 i

7338

2int3

7177

2int3

7338

7184

7345

7184

7345

5i

7191

5 i

7352

4int1

7191

3int1

7352

7198

7359

4int2

7198

3int2

7359

6i

7205

6 i

7366

4int3

7205

3int3

7366

7212

7373

7212

7373

7i

7219

7 i

7380

5int1

7219

4int1

7380

7226

7387

5int2

7226

4int2

7387

8i

7233

8 i

7394

5int3

7233

4int3

7394

7240

7401

7240

7401

9i

7247

9 i

7408

6int1

7247

5int1

7408

10

7254

10

7415

6int2

7254

5int2

7415

10 i

7261

10 i

7422

6int3

7261

5int3

7422

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L


Fig. 218. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

441 / 514

... Fig. 218. continues

7128
7135

7156
7184
7212
7163
7191
7219

7240
7247

7289
7296

7317
7345
7373
7324
7352
7380

7401
7408

H (V)
V (H)

7142
7149

7170
7198
7177
7205

7226
7233

7303
7310

7254
7261

7331
7359
7338
7366

7387
7394

7415
7422

STM1
7128
7135
7142
7149

7184
7191
7198
7205

7240
7247
7254
7261

7289
7296
7303
7310

7345
7352
7359
7366

7401
7408
7415
7422

H (V)
V (H)

7156
7163
7170
7177

7212
7219
7226
7233

7317
7324
7331
7338

7373
7380
7387
7394

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f0 = 7275

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

442 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0

9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M


STM0
fn=f0161+14n
fn=f0+14n
CS=14
DS=161
f0=7400
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M


STM1
fn=f0175+28n
fn=f014+28n
CS=28 DS=161
f0=7400
n : from 1 to 5

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7253

7414

7253

7414

1i

7260

1 i

7421

1int1

7260

1int1

7421

7267

7428

1int2

7267

1int2

7428

2i

7274

2 i

7435

1int3

7274

1int3

7435

7281

7442

7281

7442

3i

7288

3 i

7449

2int1

7288

2int1

7449

7295

7456

2int2

7295

2int2

7456

4i

7302

4 i

7463

2int3

7302

2int3

7463

7309

7470

7309

7470

5i

7316

5 i

7477

3int1

7316

3int1

7477

7323

7484

3int2

7323

3int2

7484

6i

7330

6 i

7491

3int3

7330

3int3

7491

7337

7498

7337

7498

7i

7344

7 i

7505

4int1

7244

4int1

7505

7351

7512

4int2

7351

4int2

7512

8i

7358

8 i

7519

4int3

7358

4int3

7519

7365

7526

7365

7526

9i

7372

9 i

7533

5int1

7272

5int1

7533

10

7379

10

7540

5int2

7379

5int2

7540

10 i

7386

10 i

7547

5int3

7386

5int3

7547

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M


Fig. 219. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

443 / 514

... Fig. 219. continues

7253
7260

7281
7309
7337
7288
7316
7344

7365
7372

7414
7421

7442
7470
7498
7449
7477
7505

7526
7533

H (V)
V (H)

7267
7274

7295
7323
7302
7330

7351
7358

7428
7435

7379
7386

7456
7484
7463
7491

7512
7519

7540
7547

STM1
7253
7260
7267
7274

7309
7316
7323
7330

7365
7372
7379
7386

7414
7421
7428
7435

7470
7477
7484
7491

7526
7533
7540
7547

H (V)
V (H)

7281
7288
7295
7302

7337
7344
7351
7358

7442
7449
7456
7463

7498
7505
7512
7519

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f0 = 7400

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

444 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0

9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H


STM0
fn=f0161+14n
fn=f0+14n
CS=14
DS=161
f0=7575
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H


STM1
fn=f0175+28n
fn=f014+28n
CS=28
DS=161
f0=7575
n : from 1 to 5

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7428

7589

7428

7589

1i

7435

1 i

7596

1int1

7435

1int1

7596

7442

7603

1int2

7442

1int2

7603

2i

7449

2 i

7610

1int3

7449

1int3

7610

7456

7617

7456

7617

3i

7463

3 i

7624

2int1

7463

2int1

7624

7470

7631

2int2

7470

2int2

7631

4i

7477

4 i

7638

2int3

7477

2int3

7638

7484

7645

7484

7645

5i

7491

5 i

7652

3int1

7491

3int1

7652

7498

7659

3int2

7498

3int2

7659

6i

7505

6 i

7666

3int3

7505

3int3

7666

7512

7673

7512

7673

7i

7519

7 i

7680

4int1

7519

4int1

7680

7526

7687

4int2

7526

4int2

7687

8i

7533

8 i

7694

4int3

7533

4int3

7694

7540

7701

7540

7701

9i

7547

9 i

7708

5int1

7547

5int1

7708

10

7554

10

7715

5int2

7554

5int2

7715

10 i

7561

10 i

7722

5int3

7561

5int3

7722

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H


Fig. 220. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

445 / 514

... Fig. 220. continues

7428
7435

7456
7484
7512
7463
7491
7519

7540
7547

7589
7596

7617
7645
7673
7624
7652
7680

7701
7708

H (V)
V (H)

7442
7449

7470
7477

7498
7526
7554
7505
7533
7561

7603
7610

7631
7659
7638
7666

7687
7694

7715
7722

STM1
7428
7435
7442
7449

7484
7491
7498
7505

7540
7547
7554
7561

7589
7596
7603
7610

7645
7652
7659
7666

7701
7708
7715
7722

H (V)
V (H)

7456
7463
7470
7477

7512
7519
7526
7533

7617
7624
7631
7638

7673
7680
7687
7694

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f0 = 7575

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

446 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

14 9681LSY
14.1 9681LSY part list
Tab. 73. 9681LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9681LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

7,78,3 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM
(N.B.1)

3DB02532AA

411200548

08128T

8,28,5 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM
(N.B.2)

3DB04243AA

411200589

08128T

7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB02533AA

474210268

7+128R

16

9681LSY L.O.

3DB02673AA

474210297

08LO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

N.B.1

For 7.78.3 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 1) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only lower halfband channels.

N.B.2

For 8.28.5 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 3) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only upper halfband channels.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

447 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In Fig. 221. thru Fig. 223. the possible channel plans for the 9681LSY equipment to be used for the
exploitation of the 7.7 to 8.5 GHz are shown. All these channel plans are based on ITUR
Recommendation F.386 with the following details:

Fig. 221. on page 449: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing, in case of
simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single
polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double
polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels .
9681LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.

Fig. 222. on page 450: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double polarized
antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration for alternated channels . Shifted pattern 14 MHz higher
is available too, loosing the upper channel.
9681LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
14 MHz channel spacing is available too to support the STM0 capacity.

Fig. 223. on page 451: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0
system configuration for alternated channels.
9681LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
This channel plan is in particular, utilized by OIRT (Russia).
14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM0 capacity.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

448 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

14.2 9681LSY frequency plans

9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1


STM1
fn=f0281.95+29.65n
fn=f0+29.37+29.65n
CS=29.65 DS=311.32
f0=8000
n : from 1 to 8
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

7747,70

8059,02

7777,35

8088,67

7807,00

8118,32

7836,65

8147,97

7866,30

8177,62

7895,95

8207,27

7925,60

8236,92

7955,25

8266,57

7747.70

H (V)
V (H)

7807.00

7866.30

2
1

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

7777.35

7925.60

6
5

7836.65

8059.02

7895.95

7955.25

8177.62

8
7

8118.32

8088.67

8236.92

8147.97

8
7

8207.27

8266.57

f0 = 8000

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

449 / 514

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3


STM0
fn=f0108.5+14n
fn=f0+10.5+14n
CS=14 DS=119
f0=8387.5
n : from 1 to 6
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3


STM1
fn=f0122.5+28n
fn=f03,5+28n
CS=28 DS=119
f0=8387.5
n : from 1 to 3

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

8293

8412

8293

8412

8307

8426

1i

8307

1 i

8426

8321

8440

8321

8440

8335

8454

2i

8335

2 i

8454

8349

8468

8349

8468

8363

8482

STM0

8321

8293

H (V)
V (H)

8349

8307

8440

8412

8363

8335

8468

8426

8454

8482

f0 = 8387.5

STM1
8293 8307

H (V)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

V (H)

8349

2
1

2i

2
3

1i

8468

8412 8426

8321 8335

2i
3

1i

8426 8454

f0 = 8387.5
Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

450 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3

9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4


STM0
fn=f0259+14n
fn=f0+7+14n
CS=14 DS=266
f0=8157
n : from 1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4


STM1
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
CS=28 DS=266
f0=8157
n : from 1 to 8

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7912

8178

7926

8192

7940

8206

7954

8220

7968

8234

7982

8248

7996

8262

8010

8276

8024

8290

10

8038

10

8304

11

8052

11

8318

12

8066

12

8332

13

8080

13

8346

14

8094

14

8360

15

8108

15

8374

16

8122

16

8388

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

7926

8192

7954

8220

7982

8248

8010

8276

8038

8304

8066

8332

8094

8360

8122

8388

Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 223. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

451 / 514

... Fig. 223. continues

7912 77940 7968 7996 8024 8052

H (V)

V (H) 1

4
3

10

6
7

8080 8108

12
11

7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066

16

14
13

8178 8206 8234 8262 8290 8318

15

8094 8122

4
3

10

6
7

8346 8374

12

11

14
13

8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332

16

15

8360 8388

f0 = 8157

STM1

7982

7996

H (V)
V (H)

8038

4
3

7954

8094

6
5

8010

8192

8066

8248

8122

8304

4
3

8220

8360

6
5

8276

8
7

8332

8388

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f0 = 8157

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

452 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

15 9610LSY
15.1 9610LSY part list
Tab. 74. 9610LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9610LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

10,010,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB04131AA

411200588

10128T

10,010,7 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB04126AA

474210183

10128R

16

9610LSY L.O.

3DB03971AA

474210449

10LO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

15.2 9610LSY frequency plans


In Fig. 224. on page 454 the channel plan for the 9610LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 10.0 to 10.7 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan is completely defined by the CEPTERC 1205 Recommendation and is based on a
frequency channel spacing of 28 MHz.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, the above channel plan allows the
use of a single or double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9610LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

453 / 514

9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

H (V)

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

10028

10378

10056

10406

10084

10434

10112

10462

10140

10490

10168

10518

10196

10546

10224

10574

10252

10602

10

10280

10

10630

4
3

10056

6
5

10112

10168

10

10434 10490 10546

10378

10252

10084 10140 10196

V (H)

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

10028

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

CEPTERC 1205
STM1
CS=28; DS=350
fn=f0329+28n
fn=f0+21+28n
f0=10329
n : from 1 to 10

10224 10280

10406

6
5

10602

10

8
7

10462 10518

10574 10630

f0 = 10329

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

454 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

16 9611LSY
16.1 9611LSY part list
Tab. 75. 9611LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9611LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

10,711,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB02900AA

411200555

11128T

10,711,7 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB02895AA

474210414

11128R

16

9611LSY L.O.

3DB02674AA

474210298

11LO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

16.2 9611LSY frequency plans


In Fig. 225. on page 456 ( ITUR F.387 rec. 1 ) and Fig. 226. on page 457 ( ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 ) the
two possible channel plans for the 9611LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 10.7 to 11.7
GHz band are shown.
These channel plans are completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.387 and are based on a
frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM1 per RF frequency, the above channel plans allow the
use of a single polarized antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna
up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9611LSY may work in the above plans by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

455 / 514

9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.387 rec. 1

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

H (V)

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

10715

11245

10755

11285

10795

11325

10835

11365

10875

11405

10915

11445

10955

11485

10995

11525

11035

11565

10

11075

10

11605

11

11115

11

11645

12

11155

12

11685

V (H) 1

10755

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

10795 10875 10955

10715

10835 10915

11035 11115

10

8
7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.387 recomm.1


STM1
CS=40; DS=530
fn=f0525+40n
fn=f0+5+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12

10995 11075

11325

11245

12
11

4
3

11155

11405 11485

11285

6
5

11365

11565 11645

10

8
7

11445

12
11

11525 11606 11685

f0 = 11200

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.387 rec. 1

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

456 / 514

9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2


STM1
CS=40;
DS=490
fn=f0505+40n
fn=f015+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

H (V)

Channel

Freq. [MHz]

Channel

10735

10775

11265

10815

11305

10855

11345

10895

11385

10935

11425

10975

11465

11015

11505

11055

11545

10

11095

10

11585

11

11135

11

11625

12

11175

12

11665

10815 10895 10975

10735

4
3

V (H) 1

10775

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

6
5

10855 10935

11055 11135

10

8
7

11015 11095

11305

11225

12
11

11385 11465

4
3

11175

Freq. [MHz]

11265

6
5

11345

11545 11625

10

8
7

11425

12
11

11505 11585 11665

f0 = 11200

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

457 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

458 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

17 9613LSY
17.1 9613LSY part list
Tab. 76. 9613LSY Transceiver Part List

NAME

ANV P/N

Label for
Remote
Inventory

Factory P/N

MAX
Qty

9613LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes

12,713,2 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM

3DB02890AA

411200554

13128T

12,713,2 GHZ RECEIVER

3DB02889AA

474210410

13128R

16

9613LSY L.O.

3DB02675AA

474210299

13LO

16

TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

3DB03830AA

299702973

17.2 9613LSY frequency plans


In Fig. 227. on page 460 the channel plan for the 9613LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 13 GHz band is shown.
Channel plan is completely defined by the ITUR Recommendation F.497.
9613LSY may work in the above plan by cochannel frequency reuse operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM0 capacity.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

459 / 514

ITUR F.497 rec.1


STM0
CS=14;
DS=268
fn=f0252+14n
fn=f0+14+14n
f0=12996
n : from 1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.497 rec.1


STM1
CS=28; DS=268
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
f0=12996
n : from 1 to 8

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

12758

12772

13038

12786

13052

12800

13066

12814

13080

12828

13094

12842

13108

12856

13122

12870

13136

10

12884

10

13150

11

12898

11

13164

12

12912

12

13178

13

12926

13

13192

14

12940

14

13206

15

12954

15

13220

16

12968

16

13234

LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

Channel

Freq.
[MHz]

12765

13031

12793

13059

12821

13087

12849

13115

12877

13143

12905

13171

12933

13199

12961

13227

Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.497 Rec.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 227. continues ...

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

460 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITUR F.497 Rec.1

... Fig. 227. continues

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM0

12758 12786 12814 1284212870 12898 12926 12954

H (V)

V (H) 1

4
3

10

6
7

12
11

15

13082 13080 1310813136 13164 13192 13220

16

14
13

13024

12772 12800 12828 1285612884 12912 12940 12968

10

6
7

12
11

16

14
13

15

13038 13066 13094 1312213150 13178 13206 13234

f0 = 12996

STM1

12765

H (V)

12821

2
1

V (H)

12877

4
3

12793

12933

12849

12905

13087

6
5

13031

13059

13199

12961

13143

13115

8
7

13171

13227

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f0 = 12996

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

461 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

462 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

APPENDICES

SECTION CONTENT

ED

955.203.292 Q
PAGE

Chapter 18 Documentation Guide


465

Chapter 19 SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling


483

03

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

463 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

464 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
18.1 Introduction
This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation and is organized as follows:
INFORMATION REGARDING 9600LSY REL.1.0 & 2.0 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

Productreleaseversion handbooks
on page 466
gives the list and description of the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to.

INFORMATION REGARDING CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION IN GENERAL

ED

General on Alcatel Customer Documentation


including:

on page 472

CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation

on page 472

Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

on page 473

Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks on page 475

Documentation on paper

on page 477

Documentation on CDROM

on page 479

Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers

on page 481

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

465 / 514

18.2 Productreleaseversion handbook

lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for 9600LSY
Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0 product releases

and points out those the Operators should have, in order to carry out the required operations on the
9600LSY/LHR equipment configuration.

Please refer to following para.18.3 on page 472 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.
The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR, LHRC and WMSN) introduced
in para.2.2.3 on page 41.
In para.18.2.1, starting herebelow, the documentation set specific for 9600LSY subsystem types (LHR and
LHRC) is described.
In para.18.2.2 on page 471, the documentation sets specific for associated subsystems types (OPTINEX
rack and 1650SMC) are described.

18.2.1 9600LSY specific equipment handbooks and CDROMs


The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0
system is modularly composed by different handbooks, each of which can be applied to a specific
version/configuration or to various versions/configurations.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 77. on page 467 lists the handbooks and indicates their use according to the versions/configurations
stated above.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 77. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 78. thru
Tab. 83. in the following.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

466 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This paragraph:

Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

USAGE
HANDBOOK

REF

Rel.1.0

Rel.2.0

LHR

LHR

LHRC

TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook

[A]

9600LSY/LHRC Technical Handbook

[B]

X
X

OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
9600LSY CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0

[C]

9600LSY CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0

[D]

1320CT Basic Operators Handbook

[J]

1330AS Operators Handbook

[K]

ELM Operators Handbook

[L]

INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS


9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook

[E]

9600LSY/LHR Lineup Guide

[F]

9600LSY/LHRC Installation Handbook

[G]

9600LSY/LHRC Lineup Guide

[H]

Interference investigation procedure

[I]

DOCUMENTATION CDROM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

DCP 9600LSY CD_ROM

ED

[M]

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

467 / 514

Tab. 78. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration

REF

HANDBOOK

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0


Technical Handbook

ANV Part No.

FACTORY
Part No.

3DB 02839 AAAA

955.203.292 Q

THIS
HDBK
or NOTE

To be used in the 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration.


Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition,
Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook
REF.[C] or REF.[D])

[A]

9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
Technical Handbook

3DB 02839 BAAA

955.203.293 R

To be used in the 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration.


Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition,
Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook
REF.[D])

[B]

Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control

REF

HANDBOOK

9600LSY Rel.1.0
CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0

9600LSY Rel.2.0
CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0

3DB 02838 AAAA

957.207.022 A

THIS
HDBK
or NOTE

3DB 02838 BAAA

957.207.023 B

To be used with:

SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0


in association with both LHR and LHRC configurations.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment
SW management and maintenance.

[D]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FACTORY
Part No.

To be used with:

SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0


in association with LHR configuration only.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance.

[C]

ED

ANV Part No.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

468 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 21 consists of the following handbooks:

Tab. 80. Installation and LineUp Handbooks related to the specific configuration

The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to


Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up, according to Alcatel
Installation Engineering Dept. rules.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HANDBOOK

REF

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0


Installation Handbook

[E]

ANV Part No.

FACTORY
Part No.

3DB 02840 AAAA

955.203.302 S

THIS
HDBK
or NOTE

To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations.


9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0
Line Up guide

[F]

3DB 02841 AAAA

955.203.312 K

To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations.


9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
Installation Handbook

[G]

3DB 02840 BAAA

955.203.303

To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.


9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
Line Up guide

[H]

3DB 02841 BAAA

955.203.313

To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.


Tab. 81. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products

REF

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

[I]

ED

HANDBOOK

ANV Part No.

FACTORY
Part No.

Interference investigation procedure

3DB 04165 EAAA

955.203.374 Z

THIS
HDBK
or NOTE

Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various
RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

469 / 514

Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
1320CT and Q3CTP are equivalent terms

HANDBOOK

REF

1320CT
Basic Operators Handbook

ANV Part No.

FACTORY
Part No.

3AL 79186 AAAA

957.130.542 E

THIS
HDBK
or NOTE

[J]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.5.0
Operators Handbook

3AL 71079 AAAA

957.130.442 A

[K]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook
[L]

3AL 71081 AAAA

957.130.462 E

Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.

Tab. 83. Documentation on CDROM


CDROM TITLE

REF

DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

[M]

ED

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No.

3DB 02831 AAAA

417.200.017 D

Contains, in electronic format, all handbooks: REF.[A] to [L]


Envisaged after the release of all handbooks (of a Network Element type)

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

470 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CDROMs

18.2.2.1 Handbooks and CDROMs of OPTINEX Rack


Tab. 84. Handbooks related to the products hardware

REF

HANDBOOK

[N]

Optinex Racks Rel.3.0.0 Technical Handbook

ANV Part No.

FACTORY
Part No.

3AL 37953 AAAA

955.100.922 C

Tab. 85. Documentation on CDROM


REF

CDROM TITLE

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No.

Optinex Racks Rel.3.0 CDROMDOC EN

3AL 37954 AAAA

417.100.026

[O]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[N]

18.2.2.2 Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC


1650SMC has its own:

Technical Handbook
Installation Handbook
Commissioning Handbook
CT Operators Handbook
CDROM containing the above cited handbooks.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

471 / 514

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation
characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.
This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless
Transmission Division) only.
The documentation typical contents described in para.18.3.3 on page 475, apply to handbooks issued
after February 2002.

18.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation


a)

Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as
plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to
commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B.

b)

Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.

Aims of standard Customer Documentation


Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:

the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;

maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and


production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

472 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See Fig. 229. on page 474.


a)

Products
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600USY is a product (STM1/0 Urban Digital Radio Link).

b)

Product-releases
A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 and 9600USY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same
product.
A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software
Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.

c)

Configurations and Network Elements


In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are
distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 includes various configurations with various NE types (Regenerator
1+0/1+1/2+0 with NE types UHR/UHRC; Regenerator 3+1/4+0 with NE type UHRN; WMSN with
NE types UHR/UHRC/UHM/UHMC) each of which has its own specific SWP.

d)

SWP Releases and Versions


See Fig. 228. herebelow.
A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits).
The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP release.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.
SWP version
SWP Release
Product
Releases
first digit
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes
(same SWP Release within same ProductRelease)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SWP evolution for additional features


(new SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
(N.B. see next page)
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease)

Patch Level

1.

0.

1.

0.

1.

0.

1.

1.

1.

0.

2.

0.

Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

473 / 514

e)

Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :
SWP version

SWPRelease commercial name

1.0.x

1.0

1.1.x

1.0B

1.2.x

1.0C

Customer Documentation
A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually
formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:

System and Hardware documentation:

one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) (see page 475 for details)

an Installation Handbook

a Commissioning Handbook or LineUp Guide

Software documentation:

a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease (see


page 476 for details)

other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded


in the SWP)
PRODUCT

evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0

PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0

ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS

CONFIG.A

SWP REL.1.0

PRODUCT
LEVELS

CONFIG.B

evolution

SWP REL.1.1

DOCUMENTATION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

CONFIG.A
System & HW
Documentation

SWP REL.1.0
SW
Documentation

SWP REL.1.1
SW
Documentation

Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

474 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a)

Technical Handbook
It is usually composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into
the following levels (not necessarily in this sequence):
MAIN HANDBOOK:

GENERAL INFORMATION

Documentation Guide : contains general information on the Customer Documentation


set envisaged for the equipment and detailed information regarding the specific
handbook, like handbook structure/history and abbreviation list.

SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : describes the equipment labelling


and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on
persons and/or damage to the equipment.

INFORMATIVE LEVEL

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

System Description : gives the firstlevel description of equipment in the specific


configuration the handbook is meant for. The information given is enough to understand
the equipment composition and operation and to read the operative level chapters.

Functional Description : gives the secondlevel description of equipment in the specific


configuration the handbook is meant for. Reading this chapter is not necessary to carry
out standard installation commissioning and maintenance activities.

Technical Specifications : it supplies in detail the equipment technical characteristics.

OPERATIVE LEVEL

Physical Configuration : gives detailed operative information regarding:

the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)

their physical and logical position in the system

the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description
of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)

hardware setting description

pinout description of connectors for Customer usage

summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces

Station Layouts : lists and describes the most common of all the available system
configurations envisaged for the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. For
each configuration a station layout (with cable interconnection diagram) and a simple
system block diagram are present.

Maintenance : describes the equipment routine and corrective maintenance procedures


as well as those for the unit replacement with spare parts.

Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : lists the enclosed documents having
P/N different from that of the handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other
handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.

ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS : Hardware Setting Documents and other documents for specific
purposes (typical examples: ODU repair procedures, branching detailed configurations and
drawings, etc.)

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

475 / 514

Craft Terminal Operators Handbook


It is usually composed by various sections. Each section is an independent document that can evolve
independently from the others. The sections always present are:

SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION containing the following main parts (not necessarily in this
sequence):

Documentation Guide and SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling, as


Technical Handbook

SWP description : lists and describes the Software Packages the Handbook refers to.

Installation : describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and
upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts).

ECTequipment remote connections : gives instructions to allow the remote connection


between ECT and the equipment.

SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT : gives the description of the menu structure and of all the NE
functionalities available in the Craft Terminal. This section is organized in several chapters
grouped according to the following general scheme:

General information

Equipment configuration management

Setting of parameters for maintenance

Events Log and Performance Monitoring management

Software management

SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE : gives the description of the NE troubleshooting based on


the use of the Craft Terminal.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Depending on the SWP contents, other sections can be present in the handbook, to describe other
specific applications or features.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

476 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

b)

18.3.4 Documentation on paper

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a)

Handbook format
Handbooks are supplied on A4sized papers for text and general drawings, and, when necessary,
A3sized papers for detailed drawings, in four ring solid/plasticcovered binders.

b)

Handbook languages
Handbook standard language is English. As far as handbooks supplied in other languages,
translation is relevant to the text and the drawings within the text.
With regard to Operators Handbooks containing screen prints of the software applications, the
screens included are in the language envisaged by the applicative software supplied to the Customer
(e.g. an Operators Handbook translated in Russian has the screens in English if the user interface
is not in Russian).
Engineering documentation (like selected sheets of unit schematics and component layout given
only as hardware presetting documentation) is bilingual ItalianEnglish.

c)

Handbook identification

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Each handbook is identified by:

ED

the name of the product-release,

the name of the configuration, if more than one is envisaged within the product-release,

the first two digits of the SWPversion as far as Operators Handbook is concerned,

the handbook name,

the handbook part number,

the handbook edition:

first draft edition=01A

second draft edition=01B

.....

first validated edition=01

second validated edition=02

nnth validated edition=nn

the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of printing, but
to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

477 / 514

Handbook updating
The documentation is maintained updated according to the technical changes of the product it refers
to, provided that these technical changes does really impact Customer Documentation (e.g.:
generally, bugfixing releases do not impact the Operators Handbook). Updating of handbooks,
when necessary, is done synchronously with the products industrial technical change, in due time
for having the new product version and the handbooks associated new edition available at the same
time.
1)

Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)


In case of handbook updating for its technical contents:

the edition, hence the date, is increased;

the sections/chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in a suitable
Handbook History Table in the Handbook Guide section;

a specific note in the same section sumsup the reasons for the change;

in the affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text
and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks)
are not modified unless the new SWP version distributed to Customers implies
manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the SWP
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent
version if the screen contents are unchanged.

2)

Changes due to a new product-release

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case,
the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

478 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

d)

18.3.5 Documentation on CDROM

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a)

Contents
A CustomerDocumentation CDROM is conceived to contain in readonly electronic format the
handbooks of all the product-release(configurations) of one productrelease.
The first edition of a CDROM is created only when all the handbooks of the first released
product-releaseconfiguration of one productrelease have been issued as first validated editions.
If envisaged, the handbooks relevant to other product-releaseconfigurations of the same
productrelease are added in a further CDROM edition, when they are all completed and validated.
No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the
CDROM is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper (with the same handbook
editions).

b)

Standards
CDROMs are generated according to ISO 9660 norms.
A master CDROM is obtained as follows:

each source document is converted into .pdf format by Adobe Acrobat Distiller 4.0;

bookmarks are generated for complex documents in order to make the navigation inside the
documents easier;

some hyperlinks, which make the navigation through the various handbooks easier, are
manually added. The following hyperlinks are standard:

from the INDEX document toward each individual file contained in the CDROM

from section Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes of each Technical Handbook,
toward each specific document listed in the section itself (these documents could be
collected in a separate file).
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where a master CDROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product.
The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments or any other environment for which
a suitable Reader has been envisaged by Adobe.
In order to open correctly the pdf files contained in the CDROM, the use of Acrobat Reader Version
4.0 at least is mandatory.
The CDROM does not contain the Acrobat Reader program. Getting it and installing it on the
Customer specific platform is on Customers charge.

c)

CDROM identification

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Each CDROM is identified:

ED

1)

by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper
surface:

the name of the productrelease,

a writing indicating the language(s),

the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),

the CDROM edition (first edition=01)

2)

and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

479 / 514

CDROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para.c ) point 2 ), in
association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem
as a structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive
system, the AlcatelInformationSystem automatically rises a warning toward the Customer
Documentation department, indicating the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

480 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

d)

18.3.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a)

Standard supply
Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
other Alcatel commercial item.
Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.

b)

Productdocumentation consistency
Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.

c)

Inadvance supply
Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.

d)

Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers


Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).

e)

Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

f)

Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Presently not envisaged.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

481 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

482 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING


19.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
3 ) on page 16) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the
related manuals listed in para.18.2 on page 466.
This chapter is organized as follows:

Compliance with European Norms

herebelow

Safety Rules
including:

on page 484

General Rules
Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful Optical Signals
Risks of Explosions
Moving Mechanical Parts
Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
Microwave radiations
Specific safety rules in this handbook

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)


including:

on page 484
on page 485
on page 486
on page 487
on page 489
on page 489
on page 490
on page 491
on page 491
on page 492

EMC General Norms Installation


EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation
EMC General Norms Maintenance

on page 492
on page 493
on page 493

Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

on page 494

Suggestions, notes and cautions

on page 494

Labels affixed to the Equipment


including:

on page 495

Labels specific for 9600LSY Equipment


General use labels

on page 495
on page 496

19.2 Compliance with European Norms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Refer to chapter 6 on page 315.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

483 / 514

19.3.1 General Rules

Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:

Installation

LineUp or Commissioning

Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook

Observe safety rules

When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools

In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be
aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.

For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions etc.

It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.

The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.

Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).

The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:

SAFETY RULES

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

484 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.3 Safety Rules

19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.

CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT


INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).

CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)

CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION


OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)

The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:

dangerous electrical voltages

harmful optical signals

risk of explosion

moving mechanical parts

heatradiating Mechanical Parts

microwave radiations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

485 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The symbols presented in para.19.3.3 through 19.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.

19.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages


19.3.3.1 Electrical safety: Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).

If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:

WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.

19.3.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

carefully observe the specific


procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a)

Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.

b)

Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

486 / 514

19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.3.4.1 Optical safety: Labelling


If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 608251 and 2
International Norms.
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 82511993
International Norms.

The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:

If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:

LASER class
Power emitted
Wave length
Ref. Norm
Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers

CAUTION
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT

P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993

exemple of power and lenght values

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See para.6.8.4 on page 340 for further information.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

487 / 514

On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.

DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by


the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a)

Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.

b)

Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

c)

Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.

d)

All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.

e)

Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.

f)

Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

g)

Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.

h)

Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.

19.3.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Refer to para.6.8 on page 339.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

488 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.3.4.2 Optical safety: general rules

19.3.5 Risks of Explosions

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.3.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions


This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.

19.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts


19.3.6.1 Labelling and safety instructions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

489 / 514

19.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts

The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:

As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in C ):

(TTamb)  (DTmax + 25 Tmra)


where:

T
Tamb
DTmax

Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tmra

The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment


specification or 25C, whichever is greater.

Ambient temperature during the test.


Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.

Tab. 86. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2


Maximum overtemperature (C )
Operatoraccessible parts
Metal

Glass,
porcelain

Plastic,
rubber

Handle knob, etc., held or touched


for short periods

35

45

60

Handles, knobs, etc., regularly held

30

40

50

Outer surface of the equipment that


can be touched

45

55

70

Inner surface of the equipment that


can be touched

45

55

70

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:

carefully observe the specific


procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a)

ED

Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

490 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.3.7.1 Labelling and safety instructions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.3.8 Microwave radiations


Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Ensure the transmitters are switched OFF before
working close to and in front of the antennas.
No dangerous level of microwave radiations exists outside the antenna feeder. Nevertheless, body should
not be exposed to the radiation in front of the antenna ( < 0.5 m ) for a long time ( > 6 minutes ).

19.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook


Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:

ED

chapter 7, para.7.2.2 on page 356

chapter 7, para.7.6.1 on page 373

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

491 / 514

The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks:

Installation,

LineUp or Commissioning

Maintenance chapter in this Handbook

The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:

ATTENTION

EMC NORMS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

19.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation

ED

All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar
documents)

Shielded cables must be suitably terminated

Install filters outside the equipment as required

Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance

Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.

Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)

Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

492 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation

Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)

To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given

19.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance

ED

Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)

Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.

Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

493 / 514

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:

Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:

an elasticized band worn around the wrist

a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.

ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit

19.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions


Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
statement....

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

494 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment


This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.19.3.2 (page 485)
thru 19.5 (page 494).
The label description is grouped as follows:

Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment, herebelow

General Use Labels, starting on page 496.

19.7.1 Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment


LABEL POSITION

9662 LSY

ALCATEL

1111111
A

12345

Certificato Omologazione ITALIA

ISCTI/2/1/01/044000
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

SYMBOL OR WRITING

MEANING
Alcatel Logo

ALCATEL

9662 LSY (example)


CE

Equipment Acronym
European Community Logo

12345 (example)
!

Notified body
Not harmonized frequency logo
Electrostatic Device Logo

1111111 (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Factory identification
Factory identification bar code 128

ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 (example)

Omologation certificate number (optional)

xxxxxxxxxxxxxx (example)

Omologation certificate number (optional)

Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

495 / 514

Fig. 232. thru Fig. 237. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Fig. 238. thru Fig. 239. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the
labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.

Tab. 87. Label references


Ref. No.

Name of Label

Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

Item identification label item on catalog

Label identifying the equipment

Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark

Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark

Omologation certificate number (optional)

On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.


Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

496 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.7.2 General use labels

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ABCD

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496

Fig. 232. Largesubrack labels

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

497 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

955.203.292 Q
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5
6

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.

Fig. 233. Smallsubrack labels

03

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

498 / 514

xxxxxx

xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ABC

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496

Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

499 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ABC

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.

Fig. 235. Modules label

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

500 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

NB.1

ABC

NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

501 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

NB.1
ABC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
Fig. 237. Back panels internal label

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

502 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

FACTORY P/N + CS
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER

SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE


(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)

Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS


ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)

ALCATEL FACTORY PART


NUMBER + SPACE + CS

ACRONYM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SERIAL NUMBER

SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE


(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)

Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

503 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

504 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES

SECTION CONTENT

ED

955.203.292 Q
PAGE

Chapter 20 Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes


507

03

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

505 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

506 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

20.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 90. on page 511, according to the ANV part number.
Other enclosed documents are listed in Tab. 91. on page 513.

20.2 Hardware setting documents explanation

UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS


Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:

a dual Part No.:

Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)

ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)

NOTE

The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible
alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL34065AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.

and by a pair of design & production series (change status):

CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)

ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)

The following table shows an example of correspondence between FACTORY P/N + CS and
ANV P/N + ICS
Tab. 88. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS
FACTORY CODE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ANV CODE

P/N

CS

P/N

ICS

487.156.612

01

3AL 34422 AA AA

01

487.156.612

02

3AL 34422 AA AB

01

487.156.612

03

3AL 34422 AA AC

01

The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the suffix + ICS if the ANV code is referred to.
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated
in section HANDBOOK GUIDE.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

507 / 514

CROSSREFERENCE

Tab. 89. on page 510 lists the units having HW setting options and, for each of them, indicates
the documents to be used, that are listed in Tab. 90. on page 511.

The HARDWARE SETTINGS can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to
a unit, by considering the above cited crossreference, and by using the presetting documents
indicated in Tab. 90. on page 511 and presented in the following point.

ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
ANV P/NMSxxx
is annexed to this handbook.
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in the ANV P/N order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available at the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled, or the
CDROM containing it is burned.
Use of the document MSxxx:

MSxxx means document for hardware presetting options (the MSxxx documents Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.

As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CSICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSsICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that:

a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;

a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;

the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:

from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)

to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed

the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:

one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT


To make TC Hardware Settings (when necessary) remove the protective
cover plate present on the rear side of the board and replace it at the end of the
operation

The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 90. on page 511, which
shows the ON (closed) position of microswitches.
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

508 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EXAMPLE
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 88. on page 507:
FACTORY CODE

ANV CODE

P/N

CS

P/N

ICS

487.156.612

01

3AL 34422 AAAA

01

487.156.612

02

3AL 34422 AAAB

01

487.156.612

03

3AL 34422 AAAC

01

and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

03

AC

01

If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:


FACTORY CODE

ANV CODE

P/N

CS

P/N

ICS

487.156.612

01

3AL 34422 AAAA

01

487.156.612

02

3AL 34422 AAAB

01

you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ

If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FACTORY CODE

ANV CODE

P/N

CS

P/N

ICS

487.156.612

03

3AL 34422 AAAC

01

487.156.612

04

3AL 34422 AAAD

01

you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ

ED

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

509 / 514

20.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings

Tab. 89. on this page gives the association between a unit and the documents enclosed to be
used for the unit hardware setting.

Tab. 90. on page 511 lists the documents enclosed to the handbook, sorted according to ANV
P/N.

Information for the use of HW setting documents is given in para.20.2 on page 507.
Tab. 89. Hardware setting documentation cross references
WARNING ABOUT MODEM AND TRANSCEIVER UNITS
Different types of Modem and Transceiver units are listed in this table. Be sure to use
the correct document MSZZQ, according to the unit P/N.
UNIT ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)

UNIT NAME

Documents to use
(column Id in Tab. 90. on
page 511)

COMMON UNITS (listed by P/N)


MODEM LH STM11WST

3DB 02136 AA
(411.200.535 )

[f] + [a]

MODEM LH STM00WST

3DB 02140 AA
(411.200.536 )

[g] + [a]

SERVICE

3DB 02155 AA
(411.200.539 )

[h] or [r]
+ [a]

3DB 02162 AA
(411.200.540 )

SYSTEM CONTROLLER

3DB 03238 AA
(411.200.559)

FANS ASSEMBLED

[b] or [c]
+ [i] or [q]+ [a]
See also para.3.6.2.2 on
page 142.
See point c ) on page 173

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TRANSCEIVERS (listed by frequency)

ED

3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9640LSY)

3DB 02524 AA
(411.200.543)

[p] + [j] + [a]

4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9647LSY)

3DB 02526 AA
(411.200.545)

[p] + [k] + [a]

5,96,4 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9662LSY)

3DB 01264 AA
(411.200.518)

[p] + [d] + [a]

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

510 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

20.3 List of enclosed documents

UNIT ANV P/N


(Factory P/N)

Documents to use
(column Id in Tab. 90. on
page 511)

6,47,1 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9667LSY)

3DB 01265 AA
(411.200.519 )

[p] + [e] + [a]

7,17,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9674LSY)

3DB 02531 AA
(411.200.547)

[p] + [l] + [a]

7,78,3 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY)

3DB 02532 AA
(411.200.548)

[p] + [m] + [a]

8,28,5 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY)

3DB 04243 AA
(411.200.589)

[p] + [t] + [a]

10.010.7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9610LSY)

3DB 04131 AA
(411.200.588)

[p] + [s] + [a]

10,711,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9611LSY)

3DB 02900 AA
(411.200.555)

[p] + [o] + [a]

12,713,2 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9613LSY)

3DB 02890 AA
(411.200.554)

[p] + [n] + [a]

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT NAME

Tab. 90. List of enclosed hardware setting documents


The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the
handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of
enclosed documents is not specified in this table.

UNIT NAME

Id

UNIT ANV P/N


(Factory P/N)

Enclosed Document

Documents listed and enclosed by P/N order

[a]
[b]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

[c]

ED

MICROSWITCHES ON
POSITIONS
ESCONX
N.B.

older with respect to [c]

ESCONWTD
N.B.

newer with respect to [b]

3AL 37747 0001


MSZZQ

3AL 79208 AA
(487.156.807)

3AL 79208 AAAA


MSZZQ

3AL 79208 AB
(487.156.992)

3AL 79208 ABAA


MSZZQ

[d]

5,96,4 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9662LSY)

3DB 01264 AA
(411.200.518)

3DB 01264 AAAA


MSZZQ

[e]

6,47,1 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9667LSY)

3DB 01265 AA
(411.200.519 )

3DB 01265 AAAA


MSZZQ

[f]

MODEM LH STM11WST

3DB 02134 AA
(487.210.560 )

3DB 02134 AAAA


MSZZQ

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

511 / 514

[g]
[h]
[i]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Enclosed Document

3DB 02138 AA
(487.210.561 )

3DB 02138 AAAA


MSZZQ

older with respect to [r]

3DB 02153 AA
(487.210.564 )

3DB 02153 AAAA


MSZZQ

older with respect to [q]

3DB 02160 AA
(487.210.566 )

3DB 02160 AAAA


MSZZQ

MODEM LH STM00WST
SMA
N.B.
ESC
N.B.

[j]

3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9640LSY)

3DB 02524 AA
(411.200.543)

3DB 02524 AAAA


MSZZQ

[k]

4,45,0 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9647LSY)

3DB 02526 AA
(411.200.545)

3DB 02526 AAAA


MSZZQ

[l]

7,17,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9674LSY)

3DB 02531 AA
(411.200.547)

3DB 02531 AAAA


MSZZQ

[m]

7,78,3 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY)

3DB 02532 AA
(411.200.548)

3DB 02532 AAAA


MSZZQ

[n]

12,713,2 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9613LSY)

3DB 02890 AA
(411.200.554)

3DB 02890 AAAA


MSZZQ

[o]

10,711,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9611LSY)

3DB 02900 AA
(411.200.555)

3DB 02900 AAAA


MSZZQ

[p]

RT CONTROL

3DB 03329 AA
(487.210.804 )

3DB 03329 AAAA


MSZZQ
3DB 03341 AAAA
MSZZQ

ESC
N.B.

newer with respect to [i]

3DB 03341 AA
(487.210.816 )

[r]

SMA
N.B.

newer with respect to [h]

3DB 03345 AA
(487.210.820 )

3DB 03345 AAAA


MSZZQ

[s]

10,010,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9610LSY)

3DB 04131 AA
(411.200.588)

3DB 04131 AAAA


MSZZQ

[t]

8,28,5 GHZ TRANSCEIVER


128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY)

3DB 04243 AA
(411.200.589)

3DB 04243 AAAA


MSZZQ

[q]

ED

UNIT ANV P/N


(Factory P/N)

UNIT NAME

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

512 / 514

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Id

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes)


Tab. 91. herebelow lists other documents enclosed to this handbook. Their use is explained in other parts
of the handbook.
Tab. 91. List of enclosed Annexes
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is
the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is
not specified in this table.

Documents listed and enclosed by System order

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

REF

DOCUMENT P/N

CONTENT

[1]

8BW 04007 0003 MSZZQ

Branching 9640/47 LSY

[2]

8BW 04007 0004 MSZZQ

Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL

[3]

8BW 04007 0001 MSZZQ

Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY

[4]

8BW 04007 0002 MSZZQ

Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL

[5]

8BW 04007 0005 MSZZQ

Branching 9611/13 LSY (N.B.)

[6]

8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ

Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL (N.B.)

These drawings apply also to 9610 LSY.

03
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA
514

513 / 514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT

ED

03

955.203.292 Q

3DB 02839 AA AA

514

514 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS= UNMEANINGFUL NON SIGNIFICATIVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3

01

990126

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

E.Monzani ITAVE

E.Maisano ITAVE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

MICROSWITCHES
ON POSITION

ED

01
962.000.022 MSZZQ

3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ


3

1/ 3

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

FROM CS
DA CS

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

01
962.000.022 MSZZQ

3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ


3

2/ 3

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS= UNMEANINGFUL NON SIGNIFICATIVO

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.02

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
962.000.022 MSZZQ

3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ


3

3/ 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

011016

SC01092804

E.MONZANI ITAVE

A.PIROVANO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

ESCONX

ED

01
487.156.807 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ


4

1/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

03

AA

03

01
487.156.807 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ


4

2/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.04

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.156.807 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ


4

3/ 4

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release


Refer to correct SW Release of the operators handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
487.156.807 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ


4

4/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020404

SC02040401

E.Monzani ITAVE

A.Pirovano ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

ESCONWTD

ED

01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ


4

1/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ


4

2/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ


4

3/ 4

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:


DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release
Refer to correct SW Release of the operators handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ


4

4/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

02

020910

01

011114

ED

DATE

S402090901

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

5.96.4 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

02
411.200.518 MSZZQ

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

03

AA

03

02
411.200.518 MSZZQ

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=03

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

02
411.200.518 MSZZQ

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

02
411.200.518 MSZZQ

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

02

411.200.518 MSZZQ

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

02

411.200.518 MSZZQ

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

02

020910

01

011114

ED

DATE

S402090901

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

6.47.1 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

02
411.200.519 MSZZQ

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

03

AA

03

02
411.200.519 MSZZQ

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=03

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

02
411.200.519 MSZZQ

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

02
411.200.519 MSZZQ

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

02

411.200.519 MSZZQ

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

02

411.200.519 MSZZQ

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
5

01

011114

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

MODEM LH STM11WST

ED

01
487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ


7

1/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

03

AA

03

01
487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ


7

2/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=03

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.03

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)


TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ


7

3/ 7

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR SIDE VIEW VISTA LATO RETRO

ED

01

487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ

4/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.03

*=

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation
SELEZIONE CANCCOMB (CON IF2 PRESENTE)
CANCCOMB selection ( with IF2 present )

I11

CANC

I11

COMB

I11

COMANDO PORTANTE NON MODULATA


Unmodulated carrier command

I12

DISABILITAZIONE PORTANTE NON MODULATA


Unmodulated carrier disable

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

* I12

X
X

I12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* I13

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* I14

ABILITAZIONE PORTANTE NON MODULATA


Unmodulated carrier enable

ED

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI
APERTI
Ref
Closed Open

POLARIZZAZIONE V O H MODULATORE
V or H modulator polarization

I21

POLARIZZAZIONE V MODULATORE
V modulator polarization

I21

POLARIZZAZIONE H MODULATORE
H modulator polarization

I21

X
X

01
487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ


7

5/ 7

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation
POLARIZZAZIONE V O H DEMODULATORE
V or H demodulator polarization

I22

POLARIZZAZIONE V DEMODULATORE
V demodulator polarization

I22

POLARIZZAZIONE H DEMODULATORE
H demodulator polarization

I22

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

ED

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI
APERTI
Ref
Closed Open

X
X

* I23

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* I24

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* I3

01
487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ


7

6/ 7

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

487.210.560 MSZZQ

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ

7/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
5

01

011114

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

MODEM LH STM00WST

ED

01
487.210.561 MSZZQ

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
487.210.561 MSZZQ

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.03

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)


TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)

ED

01
487.210.561 MSZZQ

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR SIDE VIEW VISTA LATO RETRO

ED

01

487.210.561 MSZZQ

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ

4/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.03

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

01
487.210.561 MSZZQ

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ


6

5/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

487.210.561 MSZZQ

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

011114

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

SMA

ED

01
487.210.564 MSZZQ

3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ


4

1/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

02

AA

02

01
487.210.564 MSZZQ

3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ


4

2/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=02

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.03

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.210.564 MSZZQ

3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ


4

3/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.03

*=

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI APERTI
Ref
Closed Open
I11

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I13

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I14

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I15

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I16

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I17

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I18

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I2

X
X

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
487.210.564 MSZZQ

3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ


4

4/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
5

01

011114

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

ESC

ED

01
487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ


7

1/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

02

AA

02

01
487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ


7

2/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=02

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.03

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)


TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)

FRONT SIDE VIEW VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ


7

3/ 7

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR SIDE VIEW VISTA LATO RETRO

ED

01

487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ

4/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.03

*=

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI APERTI
Ref
Closed Open

PER CONFIGURAZIONI SOFTWARE


For Software configuration

I1

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I2

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I3

PER CONFIGURAZIONI SOFTWARE


For Software configuration

I4

I1 / I4 : Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al Manuale dOperatore.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In order to do these settings, please refer to Operators Handbook.

ED

01
487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ


7

5/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation
DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC1

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC2

12

MEMORIZZAZIONE ALLARMI LOCALE


Loca attending of alarms

* TC3

MEMORIZZAZIONE ALLARMI ESTESO ALLA TESTATA


DI TELAIO
Alarm attending extended to rack TRU

12

TC3

12

* TC4

12

INTERFACCIA ACCESSO UNITA 10 BASE 2


Interface 10 base 2 access unit
FUNZIONE HEARTBEAT INSERITA
HEARTBEAT function enabled
FUNZIONE HEARTBEAT DISINSERITA
HEARTBEAT function disabled
BATTERIA DI SERVIZIO 48V/60V
Service battery 48V/60V
BATTERIA DI SERVIZIO 24V
Service battery 24V
ALLARME TOR ABILITATO
TOR Alarm enabled
ALLARME TOR INIBITO
TOR Alarm disabled

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI
APERTI
Ref
Closed Open

ED

TC4

12

* TC5

12

TC5

12

* TC6

12

TC6

12

01
487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ


7

6/ 7

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI
APERTI
Ref
Closed Open

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC7

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC8

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC11

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC12

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC13

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC14

12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

* TC15

12

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
487.210.566 MSZZQ

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ


7

7/ 7

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

02

020910

01

011114

ED

DATE

S402090901

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

3.64.2 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

02
411.200.543 MSZZQ

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

02
411.200.543 MSZZQ

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

02
411.200.543 MSZZQ

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

02
411.200.543 MSZZQ

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

02

411.200.543 MSZZQ

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

02

411.200.543 MSZZQ

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020909

S402090901

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

4,45,0 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

01
411.200.545 MSZZQ

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
411.200.545 MSZZQ

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
411.200.545 MSZZQ

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

01
411.200.545 MSZZQ

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

01

411.200.545 MSZZQ

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

411.200.545 MSZZQ

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

02

020910

01

011114

ED

DATE

S402090901

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

7.17.7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

02
411.200.547 MSZZQ

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

02
411.200.547 MSZZQ

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

02
411.200.547 MSZZQ

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

02
411.200.547 MSZZQ

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

02

411.200.547 MSZZQ

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

02

411.200.547 MSZZQ

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

02

020910

01

011114

ED

DATE

S402090901

CHANGE NOTE

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

7.78.3 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

02
411.200.548 MSZZQ

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

02

AA

02

02
411.200.548 MSZZQ

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=02

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

02
411.200.548 MSZZQ

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

02
411.200.548 MSZZQ

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

02

411.200.548 MSZZQ

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

02

411.200.548 MSZZQ

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020909

S402090902

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

12,713,2 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

01
411.200.554 MSZZQ

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

02

AA

02

01
411.200.554 MSZZQ

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=02

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
411.200.554 MSZZQ

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

01
411.200.554 MSZZQ

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

01

411.200.554 MSZZQ

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

411.200.554 MSZZQ

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020909

S402090902

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

10,711,7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

01
411.200.555 MSZZQ

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

02

AA

02

01
411.200.555 MSZZQ

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=02

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
411.200.555 MSZZQ

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

01
411.200.555 MSZZQ

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

01

411.200.555 MSZZQ

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

411.200.555 MSZZQ

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020909

S402090902

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

RT CONTROL

ED

01
487.210.804 MSZZQ

3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ


4

1/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

03

AA

03

01
487.210.804 MSZZQ

3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ


4

2/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=03

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.03

TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.210.804 MSZZQ

3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ


4

3/ 4

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

For the dipswitch I2I3I5 meaning, use the specific Tranceivers MSZZQ document.

Per il significato dei dipswitch I2I3I5 utilizzare il documento MSZZQ dello specifico
Ricetrasmettitore.

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
487.210.804 MSZZQ

3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ


4

4/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
5

01

020918

S402091901

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

ESC

ED

01
487.210.816 MSZZQ

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
487.210.816 MSZZQ

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)


TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)

FRONT SIDE VIEW VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.210.816 MSZZQ

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR SIDE VIEW VISTA LATO RETRO

ED

01

487.210.816 MSZZQ

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ

4/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.01

*=

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

I1 / I4 : Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al Manuale dOperatore.


In order to do these settings, please refer to Operators Handbook.

ED

01
487.210.816 MSZZQ

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ


6

5/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

487.210.816 MSZZQ

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020708

S402070901

E.CORRADINI ITACO

G.MAISTO ITACO

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

SMA

ED

01
487.210.820 MSZZQ

3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ


4

1/ 4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
487.210.820 MSZZQ

3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ


4

2/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.01

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
487.210.820 MSZZQ

3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ


4

3/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.01

*=

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

FUNZIONAMENTO Operation

R. S. PONTIC.SWITCH
StrapSwitch
Schm.
CHIUSI APERTI
Ref
Closed Open
I11

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I12

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I13

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I14

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I15

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I16

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I17

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I18

DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only

I2

X
X

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01
487.210.820 MSZZQ

3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ


4

4/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020918

S401091901

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

10,010,7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

01
411.200.588 MSZZQ

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
411.200.588 MSZZQ

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
411.200.588 MSZZQ

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

01
411.200.588 MSZZQ

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

01

411.200.588 MSZZQ

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

411.200.588 MSZZQ

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
4

01

020918

S402091901

E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO ITAVE

ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

8,28,5 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM

ED

01
411.200.589 MSZZQ

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ


6

1/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI


The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.

CHAPTER
CAPITOLO

FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ANV P/N
CODICE ANV

FROM CS
DA CS

FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO

FROM ICS
DA ICS

01

AA

01

01
411.200.589 MSZZQ

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ


6

2/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 FROM - DA

CS=01

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :

3DB 03329 AAAA

MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

ED

01
411.200.589 MSZZQ

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ


6

3/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N ECZZQ ED.01

*=

ED

FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

01
411.200.589 MSZZQ

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ


6

4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

01

411.200.589 MSZZQ

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ

5/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

ED

01

411.200.589 MSZZQ

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Technical Handbook

Alcatel 9600LSY
STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version

955.203.292 Q Ed.03

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

Documentation set for 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0


ANV P/N
Factory P/N

Handbook
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook

3DB 02839 AAAA


955.203.292 Q

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook

3DB 02840 AAAA


955.203.302 S

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Lineup Guide

3DB 02841 AAAA


955.203.312 K

Interference investigation procedure

3DB 04165 EAAA


955.203.374 Z

9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0

3DB 02838 AAAA


957.207.022 A

9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0

3DB 02838 BAAA


957.207.023 B

1320CT Version 1.3.x Basic Operators Handbook

3AL 79186 AAAA


957.130.542 E

1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook

3AL 71079 AAAA


957.130.442 A

ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook

3AL 71081 AAAA


957.130.462 E

this
Handbook

in alternative
(according to
used SWP)

When supplied on paper, this handbook and the annexed documents are divided by registers, for an easier
access to the information herein contained:

CONTENTS

REGISTER

TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
HANDBOOK GUIDE
DESCRIPTIONS
HANDBOOK

MAINTENANCE
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS
APPENDICES
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ)
Branching 9640/47 LSY
Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL

ENCLOSED
DOCUMENTS

Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY


Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL
Branching 9610/11/13 LSY
Branching 9610/11/13 LSY XPOL

955.203.292 Q Ed.03

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK


COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.292

Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0


LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)

No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 516+6


DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 164.634 kbyte

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:


HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 13 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 13
13 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 13 ARE NECESSARY

STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING


No pagine
(facciate)
No pages

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

fase
step

TARGHETTE - LABELS

FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1

HANDBOOK GUIDE

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 2 - INSERT REGISTER 2

DESCRIPTIONS

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 3 - INSERT REGISTER 3

MAINTENANCE

10

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 4 - INSERT REGISTER 4

11

FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS

12

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 5 - INSERT REGISTER 5

13

APPENDICES

numerate
numbered
da from

a to

1/514

14/514

15/514

36/514

37/514

352/514

353/514

410/514

411/514

462/514

463/514

504/514

CONTINUA CONTINUES

ED

03

RELEASED

955.203.292 TQZZA

3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA


6

1/ 6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK


CONTINUA CONTINUES
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages

fase
step

14

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 6 - INSERT REGISTER 6

15

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION &


ANNEXES

TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:

516

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:

258

STAMPARE SOLO FRONTE

da from

a to

505/514

514/514

RECTO PRINTING
COD. DOCUMENTO
document code

fase
step

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

numerate
numbered

16

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 7 - INSERT REGISTER 7

17

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ

18

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ

19

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ

20

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ

21

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ

22

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ

23

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ

24

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02153 AAAA MSZZQ

25

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ

26

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ

27

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ

28

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ

29

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ

30

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ

31

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ

32

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ

33

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ

34

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 03345 AAAA MSZZQ

35

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ

36

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ

CONTINUA CONTINUES

ED

03

RELEASED

955.203.292 TQZZA

3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA


6

2/ 6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK


CONTINUA CONTINUES
COD. DOCUMENTO
document code

fase
step

37

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 8 - INSERT REGISTER 8

38

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT


Branching 9640/47 LSY

39

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 9 - INSERT REGISTER 9

40

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT


Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL

41

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 10 - INSERT REGISTER 10

42

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT


Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY

43

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 11 - INSERT REGISTER 11

44

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT


Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL

45

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 12 - INSERT REGISTER 12

46

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT


Branching 9611/13 LSY

47

INSERIRE SEPARATORE 13 - INSERT REGISTER 13

48

INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT


Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL

8BW 04007 0003 MSZZQ

8BW 04007 0004 MSZZQ

8BW 04007 0001 MSZZQ

8BW 04007 0002 MSZZQ

8BW 04007 0005 MSZZQ

8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ

FINE ISTRUZIONI ASSEMBLAGGIO END OF ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

ED

Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

Handbook source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1 + PDF

The documents MSZZQ are archived in PDAS individually (ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI
3.9.1 + PDF); get the highest edition. The pdf files can be directly retrieved from intranet WTD
web site.

PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.

03

RELEASED

955.203.292 TQZZA

3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA


6

3/ 6

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

Site
VIMERCATE

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

WTD

Originators
E.CORRADINI
F.BUTORI
G.MAISTO

9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0
LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

Domain
Division
Rubric
Type
Distribution Codes

:
:
:
:

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK


Internal :
External
:

Approvals
Name
App.

G.CONSONNI

A.PANZERI

Name
App.

M.IDI, E.PARISI

R.PELLIZZONI

R.DIAZZI, A.BESTETTI

955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AAAA
Ed.03
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

ED

03

RELEASED

955.203.292 TQZZA

3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA


6

4/ 6

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System

LHR version

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

VOL.1/1

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0


STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

VOL.1/1

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0


STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

VOL.1/1

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0


STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

955.203.292 Q Ed.03

ED

03

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

VOL.1/1

RELEASED

955.203.292 TQZZA

3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA


6

5/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT

ED

03

RELEASED

955.203.292 TQZZA

3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA

6/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

NOTES ON NAVIGATION AND PRINTING

NAVIGATION
THIS HANDBOOK IS COMPOSED BY SEVERAL DOCUMENTS.
PAGE NUMBERING RESTARTS FROM 1 AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH DOCUMENT.
CROSS REFERENCES (ex. see Figure 3 on page 45) ARE ALWAYS INSIDE THE DOCUMENT
WHERE YOU ARE, AND ARE REFERRED TO THE DOCUMENT PAGES (NOT TO THE PDF FILE
PAGE NUMBERING).

PRINTING
BESIDES TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN WARNING ON NAVIGATION,
TAKE INTO ACCOUNT THAT:

PDF FILE PAGES 1 TO 514 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING.

PDF FILE PAGES 515 TO 624 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO PRINTING

PDF FILE PAGES 625 TO 634 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING (PAGE
633/634 IS THIS PAGE).

IN ORDER TO PRINT A SELECTED PART OF THE HANDBOOK:

GO ON THE FIRST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER

GO ON THE LAST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER

THESE TWO NUMBERS ARE THE RANGE TO BE SPECIFIED FOR PRINTING.

END OF FILE